www.DearEditor.com

98 result(s) found.

Flashback, Part 2: How Come If I Stay’s Opening Works?

////

Dear Readers…

Last week a writer—Diane—asked me why some current bestsellers that start with backstory or as the day is dawning can make those slower beginnings work so well? She specifically asked about The Fault in Our Stars and If I Stay. I posted my answer about The Fault in Our Stars last week. I think this is such a useful exploration of story beginnings that I’m taking up that same question today, this time parsing out If I Stay‘s opening.

The Editor

Dear Diane…

Gayle Forman’s If I Stay opens with what looks like a no-no: the protagonist joins her family for breakfast and they discuss plans for the day. Too often such “dawning day” openings just introduce the protagonist and show her “home base” as a reference point before she leaves for adventure. A strong opening doesn’t just introduce and ground—it intrigues readers in ways that prompt further reading. Forman intrigues by triggering and stoking anticipation. Her chapter header is “7:09 a.m.”, setting up the expectation that a big thing will happen any minute. Then the first two sentences tell us some big “it” is pending. Next, the family debates whether to stay off the icy roads. By then, readers—who know they’ve chosen a book about a girl deciding to live or die after she’s the only survivor of her family’s car crash—have their metaphoric hands over their eyes, thinking, “No! Stay home!” Forman stokes anticipation even as she shows the loving family her protagonist will lose, setting up the heroine’s emotional anguish. Dawning day, yes, but that dawn is loaded.

Happy writing!
The Editor

*This flashback favorite post was originally published 9/22/2014

The Editor, Deborah Halverson, has been editing books for over 25 years and specializes in Middle Grade/Young Adult fiction and nonfiction, New Adult fiction, and picture books. For her editorial guidance in making your manuscript ready for submission to agents and publishers or for self-publishing, click Editorial services. Learn more in her books: Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies and Writing New Adult Fiction.

On Revision: Kathleen Krull, in Memoriam

/

Kathleen Krull is an esteemed figure in children’s literature. Her books for young readers are fixtures in school curriculum and appear on countless awards lists and bookshelves. I had the honor of working with Kathleen on many books at Harcourt Children’s Books. For DearEditor.com’s 2012 Revision Week, I interviewed Kathleen to explore her revision process. Last Friday, the children’s books world lost this amazing talent, and I lost a dear friend. In Kathy’s memory, I repost that insightful interview.

Kathleen Krull has written over a hundred books for young readers, most of them nonfiction. Among her most beloved books are Harvesting Hope: The Story of Cesar Chavez and the Lives Of series, which are collective biographies featuring 20 fascinating historical figures in each volume and stunning portraits by Kathryn Hewitt. To me, the Lives Of subtitles capture Kathleen’s lively approach to nonfiction:

  • Lives of the Athletes: Thrills, Spills (and What the Neighbors Thought) 
  • Lives of the Scientists: Experiments, Explosions (and What the Neighbors Thought) 
  • Lives of Extraordinary Women: Rulers, Rebels (and What the Neighbors Thought)
  • Lives of the Pirates: Swashbucklers, Scoundrels (Neighbors Beware!)

I had the honor of working with Kathleen on many of the Lives Of books, as well as other books at Harcourt Children’s Books. For DearEditor.com’s 2012 Revision Week, I interviewed Kathleen to find out how she revised her stories. Her answers give us a glimpse into one writer’s process, but more than that, they open up possibilities for improving our own processes. I share that interview with you today.

Kathleen Krull photo credit: ©HMH/ Sandy Huffaker

When you write a new picture book manuscript, how many drafts does it typically take before you’ll show it to an editor?

From the days when every penny counted, I’m so cheap with paper that I don’t print out a draft after I make every little change, so it’s hard to say. I print at least 10 to 15 drafts, representing what seem like substantial changes, before I’m happy. When I get to the point of taking out commas and putting them back in again, I feel ready to send it off.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

A lot, as you know, Deborah, from sitting across the desk from me once upon a time. A good example is Harvesting Hope: The Story of Cesar Chavez. True story: between what I thought was my final draft, and what emerged after the editorial process, only one sentence stood intact: “Grapes, when ripe, do not last long.” It’s not that I deliberately send in something unpolished, it’s that editors are indispensable. (Note from The Editor: Kathy gave me permission to take credit for coming up with the “Harvesting Hope” title. Kathy’s other wonderful editor at Harcourt, Jeannette Larson, was the primary editor on this book.) Watch the National Endowment for the Humanities book trailer for Harvesting Hope here.

You’ve started co-writing with your husband, author/illustrator Paul Brewer. How does that collaboration work?

It’s truly a collaboration. One of us will start with an idea (Fartiste, needless to say, was his), a paragraph, or a first page, and we’ll then pass drafts back and forth, endlessly tweaking. Paul specializes in research. With Lincoln Tells a Joke, he found all the jokes. Same thing with our upcoming funny book about the Beatles. (The Beatles Were Fab (and They Were Funny.) My focus is the final fine-tuning of the words. He typically works at night and I work days, so I’ll hand things off to him at the end of the day and find it back on my desk the next morning.

Did you use Paul or other critique partners for the books you wrote solo in the past?

Paul is usually the only one I show manuscripts to, for the simple value of watching his face as he reads. I can tell when he gets hung up, confused, or amused, and I use those reactions as clues when I’m revising.

Do you ever read your picture book manuscripts to kids to test them out?

I’ve tried this, but haven’t found it that helpful. I lean toward the “too many cooks” theory, that my views and the editor’s (and sometimes Paul’s) are what matter. More input than that can be muddling.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

With my biography of Dr. Seuss (The Boy on Fairfield Street: How Ted Geisel Grew Up to Become Dr. Seuss), I found it flummoxing that his life, from all outward appearances, was pretty darn charmed. I like to write about obstacles overcome, battles fought and won, and with him the more I researched, the less conflict I found. After many, many drafts, I was finally able to tease out the theme that fooling around with words and pictures was not considered appropriate for an adult—but he did it anyway.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

With Fartiste, Paul and I tried every which way to tell the story of Joseph Pujol, a real French performer whose entire act was farting on stage. Nothing clicked until I hit upon telling the story in rhyme. Paul thought this was a terrible idea—among other reasons, most editors hate stories in rhyme. But then I came up with a few funny verses, and we were off and running. I’d like to use this remedy again, but it would have to be the right subject.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

When the editor and I have wrestled it into a story that seems to have written itself—that’s the goal anyway.

Thank you all for reading. I hope you enjoyed this glimpse at how Kathy worked her magic. While I miss my friend terribly, my heart soars knowing that her books will continue to enlighten, entertain, and inspire.

*Some books Kathleen published after this interview: Joey: The Story of Joe Biden (with Dr. Jill Biden), Starstruck The Cosmic Journey of Neil DeGrasse Tyson and, No Truth Without Ruth: The Life of Ruth Bader Ginsburg. Also, check out the book trailer for her upcoming Walking Toward Peace: The True Story of a Brave Woman Called Peace.

**To read more interviews about revision, go to the Revision Week Interviews Archive.

Is a Lot of Violence OK in YA Novels?

Dear Editor…

My YA historical WIP, set in ancient times, includes a lot of violence. One character is murdered in a mill. Another (we don’t see this but hear about it) is strangled and drowned. The villain tries to kill the protagonist multiple times, she’s attacked by an animal, and her friend loses a limb in a carriage chase. Finally, the hero kills the villain by stabbing him with an object she grabs during a struggle. Of course, the teens are defending themselves and others. See what I mean? Works for me but I’m wondering what you think.

Thanks,
Writing Under Sunny Skies

Dear Writing Under Sunny Skies

There’s violence in YA literature. And why not? There’s violence in the world, and books help readers learn to process hard realities in an emotionally and physically safe way. You’re taking care to draw a line and not cross it regarding your violent content. That’s great—it suggests to me that your violence won’t be gratuitous. Reader impact aside, violence included for shock value isn’t strong storytelling. It’s gimmicky. And don’t we all want to be the strongest storytellers we can be? A strong story gets readers to care about characters and relationships so that there’s intense emotional payoff when those are taken away or damaged. In your case, the payoff comes when characters we love are lost, and other characters we love must process that loss. Turns out, there’s lot of loss in the world your characters inhabit. That’s common in high adventure stories, dystopian fantasies, historical atrocity stories, and so on. There’s this to consider, too: When you build rich characters and relationships, and deliver setting and atmosphere that add to plot tension, then when violence strikes, you don’t need to be graphic about it to score your literary gut-punch. That’s a wise approach for YA fiction. Each young reader will picture the event using only as much detail as they can handle. Allow them that safety filter. Empower them to decide how much is just enough. Empowered readers are engaged readers, and engaged readers are happy readers who tell their friends about your fab book and reach for your next one. 

Happy writing!
The Editor

Can One Agent Rep All Three of My Writing Categories?

//

Dear Editor…

I’ve written a YA, an adult memoir/novel, and a screenplay. Do you know if one agent would ever represent such a large swath of genres, or would I be best served trying to find an agent for each?

Sincerely,
Writer with Many Hats

Dear Writer with Many Hats…

One agent isn’t likely. Literary agents know their markets deeply and foster relationships with many editors—which is a lot of work. Add knowing the entertainment industry and its markets, too, and networking its pool of professionals, and we’re talking Herculean workload. But you don’t necessarily need three separate agents, either. Quite a few lit agents rep both YA and some category of books for adults, so put your first efforts into researching a lit agent who reps YA and memoir. That agent will almost certainly have a relationship with a subagent who handles book-to-film rights and maybe original screenplays. In that scenario, when the subagent sells your screenplay, you’ll get your full share of advance and royalties while the agent portion is split between the two agents. And hey, if the agent/subagent scenario doesn’t work out, don’t feel overwhelmed by the thought of three. I have three agents. My first agent repped children’s books only, so when I wrote Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies and then Writing New Adult Fiction, agents specializing in adult nonfiction and craft books came into the mix. Everyone has their lanes and it’s all good. Just remember, whether you use one, two, or three, your representative(s) should have a strong market knowledge and professional network.

Happy writing!
The Editor



Which Writing Software Should I Use to Write My Book?

Dear Editor…

I’ve recently been inspired to write a New Adult novel. I have a pretty clear idea of what I want my book to be. I’ve never written a book before so I decided I would do some research and came upon your book Writing New Adult Fiction. I’ve read a good part of the book and think it can definitely help me as I move forward with my story. The only thing I’m not quite sure about yet is which software/app I should use to write my book. I’ve heard of a couple but I’d really like to know which ones you would recommend I use. Thank you so much for your help!

Best regards,
Veronica

Dear Veronica…

The best choice for you is the software that facilitates your unique creative process rather than impedes it. I’m comfortable with Word so I use it exclusively, as do many writers I surveyed this week via social media. After receiving your question, I posted, “Writer friends: Your fav writing software and why?” The detailed responses were so illuminating I’ve compiled them anonymously as a pdf for you: Writing Software Testimonials. (Dear readers, I’d love to hear your fav and why.) Many writers shared that they use different programs at different stages of writing. Well-known  Scrivener is beloved for features that help organize the story, tracking characters, plot lines, etc. If research is part of your project, you might like its split screen feature, allowing you to view research as you write the story. It can be complicated to a newbie but its devotees are many. Sometimes writers use Scrivener for outlining only, or maybe writing a first draft, then move to more straightforward Word (or Pages, Apple’s word processing program). Power Structure was praised for organizing, and Evernote for collecting inspiration and research. Dragon Naturally Speaking Premium is new to me: this voice-to-text software can read your words back to you, helpful for editing because you “hear things your eyes might miss.” Co-writers told me they use Google Docs to work on the same manuscript from separate computers. And let’s not ignore old-fashioned pen and paper. My dear friend Jean Ferris first-drafted all her novels longhand on a legal tablet, then edited as she typed that into Word. Many writers hail the tactile act of putting pen to paper as essential to their creative process. Read the 2-page pdf—it’s intriguing! Whichever your choice, you’ll eventually convert the manuscript to Word, the format most agents, editors, and publishers require for manuscript transmittal.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Not Feeling the Love

/

Dear Editor…

There’s a romance in my novel. An early reader said she’s not rooting for the couple like she thinks she should and I know that’s bad (obviously), but I don’t know what to do about it. Help?

Sincerely,
R.

Dear R….

Ask the reader if she’d root for the individual characters. After all, if we’d root for Jess no matter what Jess’s problem is, and we’d root for Chris no matter what Chris’s problem is, then we’d probably root for Jess and Chris as a couple. Help us know each character beyond looks, job/school status, and key problem. We’d learn those on a first date. What would we discover on the second date? The sixth? That’s the stuff to reveal as the story rolls out. What are their habits? What topics provoke/calm them? How would their reactions to others differ if you change the others’ gender, politics, class, ethnicity, etc? What fears/hopes do they have besides the Main Goal? What would they not want revealed? What would they yearn to share? Flesh out characters with action that reveals moods, opinions, judgments. When we know two individuals well (the good and bad) we’re intrigued to see how they interact as a couple—and we care about the outcome.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Revision Week: Winner and Week Off

/

Dear Readers…

I hope you enjoyed the 4th annual Revision Week. I created this event to inform and inspire your own revision and am honored by the authors who’ve helped. Want more? Visit Revision Week Archive. Want to dig deeper into craft? Check out the advice from myself and 20+ author, editor, agent, and industry contributors including Revision Week guest Jane Yolen in Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies and Writing New Adult Fiction. DearEditor.com will return June 13 with answers to YOUR craft and industry questions.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Thank you…

PAM MUNOZ RYAN. Check out her recent Newbery Honor book Echo. pammunozryan.com

SALINA YOON. Check out her new book Duck, Duck, Porcupine! salinayoon.com

CHANEL CLEETON. Look for her Wild Aces: Into the Blue July 5. chanelcleeton.com

JANE YOLEN. Look for her How Do Dinosaurs Write their ABCs with Chalk? June 28. janeyolen.com

MARIE FORCE. Look for her Fatal Identity July 26.  marieforce.com

Revision Week: Marie Force

///

Dear Readers…

Revision Week ends with a flourish thanks to the fabulous Marie Force, author of some of our favorite contemporary romance series. Marie has sold more than five million copies of her books worldwide, some self-published, others traditionally published. She is talented, prolific, and here to give us a glimpse into her process. Today also brings us to the grand finale giveaway: a Free Full Manuscript Edit by the Editor. Read the full post for giveaway details and Marie’s interview.

Marie ForceMarie Force is the New York Times bestselling author of over 50 contemporary romances, including the Gansett Island Series, which has sold more than 2.3 million books, and the Fatal Series from Harlequin Books, which has sold more than 1.2 million books. In addition, she is the author of the Green Mountain Series as well as the new erotic romance Quantum Series, written under the slightly modified name of M.S. Force. For more intriguing insights, pop over to Marie’s website and read her full bio to learn about her experiences as an author who works with traditional publishers while also self-publishing to great success. The tenth book in Marie’s Fatal Series, Fatal Identity, comes out July 26.

Marie’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form/entry link for today’s Free Full Edit by the Editor giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

You’ve told me you work toward a publishable first draft. How does being a “pantser” affect your efforts to reach “publishable” in a one draft? I write from the beginning and go straight through, going back repeatedly to the beginning to edit, tweak, refresh, update, and remind myself of what I need to get done in the remaining pages. Re-reading is a huge part of my process and usually sparks new plot ideas. I just did a re-read on my work in progress today to get back in the writing groove after the weekend.
FatalAffair
At what point will you typically stop to re-read? I stop to re-read whenever I feel the need to remind myself of where I started. Sometimes I do it frequently during the writing of a book and other times I only do it once or twice. It’s always a good reminder of where I’ve been and where I’m intending to go with the story.

MaidforLoveWhat role do critique partners, beta readers, or professional editors play in your process? I’ve never had critique partners. I don’t want another writer’s voice inside my head when I’m writing. I have three longtime beta readers and one of my team members acts as a front-line reader, too. They are helpful in identifying missing words (my specialty), questions that need to be answered, and any plot holes that might need to be addressed. I have a copy editor and proofreader for my indie books. My traditionally edited books get some minor developmental edits and line edits, but they are never much.

Treading WaterYour first book took you three years to write. Can you share a key insight or change in your process that have contributed to your current ability to write books in weeks and months? I learned all the biggest and hardest lessons with my first book, Treading Water, which I massively overwrote. I ended the first draft with a bloated 155,000-word manuscript in which I was highly indulgent of my muse. I’ve roped her into submission since then, and that’s never happened again. My second book, the follow-on to the first one, was written in 90 days and came in at 90,000 words. I’ve hardly touched a single word of it in the nearly ten years since I finished it. Whereas I continued to tweak and fine-tune the first one until I published it six years after writing The End. By then, it was a much leaner, meaner 92,000 words, and it was the same exact story. Those are the kind of lessons I didn’t need to learn twice. Now if a scene I want to write doesn’t move character X’s story forward in a meaningful way, it doesn’t get written. I’m pretty ruthless when it comes to getting rid of the bloat and keeping my story zipping forward.

VirtuousNewHow do you know you’ve got the final draft? The last thing I do is read the manuscript on my Kindle, the way a reader would. By the time I get to The End, I’ve already edited the first half numerous times, so final edits tend to focus on the second half. Once I am able to read the book all the way through without stopping for any reason, it’s done. That usually happens fairly close to actually finishing the writing, because I’ve been fine-tuning all along. That’s how my first draft becomes a finished book.

Thank you, Marie!

You can follow Marie on Facebook, Twitter @marieforce and on Instagram, join one of her many reader groups, and get on her mailing list for news about new books and upcoming appearances in your area. Contact Marie at marie@marieforce.com.

FatalIdentity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revision Week: Jane Yolen

/

Dear Readers…

What a pleasure to share with you, on Day 4 of Revision Week, insights from the amazing Jane Yolen, celebrated author of over 300 books for young people. Jane has written picture books, novels, and poetry collections, in genres including fantasy, science fantasy, and fairy tales. She’s a master at craft with an endless imagination, a work ethic that staggers, and a deep respect for her young readers. Please join Jane and The Editor for Day 4 of Revision Week, and enter to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Screen Shot 2016-05-16 at 12.30.48 PMJane Yolen has written over 300 books, won numerous awards, and been given six honorary doctorates in literature. A poet, a fairy tale teller, a writer of fiction across genres and for all ages, Jane has been called the Hans Christian Andersen of America and the Aesop of the twentieth century. Some of her best known books are the Caldecott Award winner Owl Moonthe National Jewish Book Award Winner The Devil’s Arithmetic, and the beloved How Do Dinosaurs… picture books. Jane is also well known for teaching writing to young people and adults. She honored me by writing an essay about crafting distinct voices for my book Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, and today she shares insights regarding the revising process with all of us.

Jane’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form/entry link for today’s “Free Partial Edit by The Editor” Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

As prolific as you are, will you work on multiple WIPs in a single day or do you prefer to stay in one fictional realm per day? I work on multiple things as well as on my students’ pieces/revisions. I find that such literary multitasking keeps me on my toes and keeps me from getting stale.

Would your ideal writing day begin with original drafting or with revision? Why? It all depends on 1) deadline, 2) a revision request sailing in from an editor, and 3) what else is on my plate at the time.

Devils ArithmeticFor novels, how many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made? I am not a planner and plotter, so my novels come together in the latter stages of revisions. But they feel fresher to me for that. I call it “flying into the mist.” Others call it pantser (seat of the pants) writing, which has a pejorative and hectoring tone to me.

Owl moonHow much revising typically happens after you involve your editor? Depends on the editors. I had one who told me my novel needed nothing. And I said, every piece of writing needs something. She said, “Take out the exclamation marks.” Since I hate them in formal writing (though not to friends!!!) I went through the novel again. Made a number of small but important revisions and took out the one exclamation point. Most editors are much more hands-on.

Sarah BarkerCan you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did? I had an historical novel called The Gift of Sarah Barker, which takes place during three days in the 1840s in a Shaker community. In the end, I thought I was going to have the young woman, Sarah, and her new husband, Abel (Shakers are not supposed to marry but be as sexless as angels), going out into the world. He was to join the Union Army and be killed. She would take their new little daughter and go—as her mother did with her—to live again with the Shakers. But when I got to the end, I loved Sarah (who was smart and sassy) and Able (who was kind and giving) too much to have that be their (un)happy ending. And while the editor loved the book, she questioned why it took place in three days. As I tried to explain it to her face-to-face in a meeting, I suddenly realized that I—as a fairy tale teller—was trying to impose the Rule of Three on a historical novel. And when I told her that, she smiled enigmatically and said, “You must trust your audience. They will reward that trust by following you wherever you go.” It ended up one of the most satisfying re-writing experiences I have ever had in a novel AND simply made the book work.

How do dinosaursYou’ve said, “If I ever write the perfect book, I’ll stop writing.” With perfection off the table, how do you know when you’re looking at your best and final draft? Geeze—I wish I had someone who could tell me that! Sometimes an editor simply takes it out of my hands.

Thank you, Jane!

You can follow Jane on Facebook and Twitter @JaneYolen.

How Do Dinosaurs Say I Love You?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revision Week: Chanel Cleeton

//

Dear Readers… Day 3 of DearEditor.com’s Revision Week brings us Chanel Cleeton, author of four popular thriller and romance series, including the brand new Wild Aces. Please join Chanel and The Editor for Day 3 of Revision Week, and enter to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Chanel CleetonChanel Cleeton writes contemporary romances, women’s fiction, and thrillers. She is the author of the International School series and the Capital Confessions, both contemporary romance, as well as the New Adult thriller series Assassins. Her newest novel, Fly with Me, is the first in the new Wild Aces contemporary romance series and pubs next month, with the second book, Into the Blue, following in July. Chanel is published by Harlequin HQN, Penguin/InterMix, and Penguin/Berkley.

Chanel’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form/entry link for today’s Free Partial Edit by the Editor Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made? Each manuscript varies for me, but I typically feel pretty good about major arcs fairly early on and then I go through many, many drafts cleaning up the manuscript until I can read though it without finding anything I want to fix. I’m a pantser, but I spend a lot of time thinking about my characters and developing them and the story threads in my head, so by the time I start writing I’m familiar with the world I’m building and am able to follow the threads as they unspool. I spend a lot of time tweaking my manuscripts for things like dialogue, sentence construction, etc., but big picture items usually don’t change very much from first draft to final.

Fly with MeDo you use critique partners or beta readers? I typically don’t. I tend to work best in my head so I like to finish the draft and then send it off to my agent and editor to get their thoughts. My traditional publishing schedule often makes it tough to get feedback from critique partners or beta readers if I’m on a tight turnaround for a book.

I+SEE+LONDON+COVERWhich draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft? This varies by book, but I would say at an absolute minimum, I go through four drafts before I send a book to my editor. Sometimes the number is higher. Once I’m through with the first draft, I ALWAYS edit once on my computer, once on a printed draft, and once on an e-reader because changing formats always helps me to catch new things. Sometimes I’ll go through this process a few more times if I’m still catching things. My editor can see anywhere from my fourth to twelfth draft. When I get edits back, I typically like to go through each stage of edits (developmental, copy, and proofreading) three times to make sure I’ve caught everything.

Flirting with ScandalCan you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did? I find a lot of writing solutions when I step away from my computer so I’ll often find that some of my best ideas come when I’m doing something else. For some reason, I seem to be super productive when washing my hair. 🙂 I think about my characters and story all the time when drafting and often letting the story live in my head a bit helps me to think outside the box and come up with a solution for whatever might be stumping me.

Between ShadowsWould your ideal writing day consist of original drafting or revising? Why? That’s a great question! It definitely depends on my mood. I LOVE revising because there’s something rewarding about polishing your manuscript and whipping it into shape. At the same time, I love the magic of drafting and watching my story unfold and take me in unexpected directions.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft? I try to read through my manuscript as a reader would and flag anything that pulls me out of the story or doesn’t flow properly. When I can read through the manuscript without flagging anything and I’m happy with it, I consider it my final draft. From the first moment I sit down at my computer to the moment a reader has my book in their hands, I’ve typically gone through about fifteen drafts of the story.

Thank you, Chanel!

 Fly with Me

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revision Week: Salina Yoon

//

Dear Readers…

Revision Week continues with Salina Yoon, author/illustrator of more than 160 books for kids. Salina’s characters Penguin and Bear are adored by young children around the world, and it’s an honor to have her here talking about the revision process with picture books, both the text and visual storylines. Please join Salina and The Editor for Day 2 of Revision Week, and enter to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Screen Shot 2016-05-16 at 12.24.33 PMSalina Yoon is an award-winning and bestselling author/illustrator of over 160 books for children, including her popular picture book series with the adventurous Penguin and the lovable Bear. Other titles include Be a Friend, and Duck, Duck, Porcupine!, the first book of a brand new early reader series. Learn more about Salina and her books at salinayoon.com. Also, enter to winsigned a copy of Duck, Duck, Porcupine! (a book that made me laugh out loud), which just pubbed last week!

Salina’s interview follows the Rafflecopter forms/entry links for the signed copy of Duck, Duck, Porcupine! and today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

a Rafflecopter giveaway

For your books, you’re both author and illustrator. Do your stories start their development as words or pictures? Stories begin for me with an idea or a concept. Once I feel like there’s an idea to explore, I come up with a specific character that would best execute this idea. When the character is imagined, it helps to develop the story with more authenticity.

DUck Duck PorcupineHow many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made? Usually, it’s around the third draft of storyboarding (sketches and text) where I feel like it’s either there or it isn’t. That doesn’t sound like much, but most drafts are being thought out in my mind before it’s even written. I mull ideas over and let them stay in my head until they feel worthy enough to be put on paper.

Be a friendWhich draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft? This depends on which editor it is going to. The editors I work with regularly for on-going series projects will get much looser, earlier storyboard drafts. For new editors on a new project submission, I would dummy out the entire book with tighter sketches and lots of finished art samples to have a clear representation of the final book. For Be a Friend, I dummied up nearly half the 40-page picture book with finished illustrations. After it was acquired, I ended up re-doing the artwork for the entire book because I was unsatisfied with my own quality of the illustrations. So doing the final artwork in the submission stage does not necessarily mean you will have less work to do once it is acquired. After the book was sold, I did two minor revisions with my editor, though the first revision required a new ending! But the ending did not require the beginning or middle to change in this case. thumbnails[Editor’s note: Over the years I’ve witnessed Salina’s personal encouragement of writers and illustrators­, so it’s no surprise to me that she’s gone the extra step of providing sketch drafts for us. Click on this pdf to see her original third draft of the Duck, Duck, Porcupine! storyboard, the version she shared with her editor. The coin in the scan shows how small those sketches actually are—roughly 3″x2″. That’s as big as she works until going to final art. She enlarges the thumbnails digitally then sends them to her editor to comments upon. thumbnails2You’ll see her editor’s notes in green; the other notes surrounding the spread are Salina’s as she begins the revision process.]

Do you use critique partners? I do not have critique partners, but I have a couple of trusted writer friends that I like to share my ideas with.  Or sometimes, I just go straight to my agent to hear what she thinks. For sequel ideas, I go straight to my editor.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did? I approach writing a story like solving a puzzle. Each piece is critical in telling the story. I cut out the pieces of my thumbnails so that each spread is loose. I arrange them in page order and see which scenes are weak, or not progressing the story. Then I simply replace the weak link with a revised piece, or simply delete it and move on. There is always lots of cutting, swapping, and taping in my crafty hands-on approach to revising.

Penguin and PineconeWhat’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising? I’ve changed the goal of the character, which of course changed the plot, and of course changed the ending! And another time, I changed the ending… which required me to change the beginning… and revise the middle. It’s hard to change one part without impacting everything else in the story.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft? I have many false finals before it gets to the real final! This is a tough thing to know for certain, but it’s when it goes to press that I feel confident that this is it!

Thank you, Salina!

You can follow Salina on Facebook and Twitter @salinayoon.

Penguin and Pinecone on Vacation

Revision Week: Pam Munoz Ryan

/

Dear Readers… Revision Week kicks off with Newbery Honor author Pam Munoz Ryan. She’s written picture books, beginning readers series, and middle grade novels, many of which are taught in schools nationwide, including one of The Editor’s favorites, Esperanza Rising. Please enjoy Pam’s interview, and enter to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

 

Pam Munoz RyanPam Munoz Ryan is the author of more than 30 books for young readers, including four beloved novels, Riding Freedom, Esperanza Rising, Becoming Naomi León, and Paint the Wind, which collectively have garnered, among countless accolades, the Pura Belpré Medal, the Jane Addams Award, and the Schneider Family Award. Pam’s latest novel, Echo, is a Newbery Honor Book. Pam has written picture books and beginning readers, but for this discussion of revision we focus on her novel writing. www.PamMunozRyan.com

Pam’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form/entry link for today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made? Does this vary substantially for picture books versus novels?  I don’t know, exactly, how many drafts it takes before I feel confident about the character and the story. I think I work on both until the last rewrite. Since I work on a computer, I don’t print every draft, so it’s hard to determine a number. Also, I’m a recursive writer. I begin a novel in an opening scene. The next time I sit down to work, I read what I had written previously, rewriting a bit as I go along, and then I continue writing to build the story. The next day, I start at the beginning again, reading and rewriting, and inching the story forward. There does come a point in novel writing that I don’t go all the way back to the beginning, but start, for example, several chapters back from the point I had stopped. For me, writing is an evolution, more than a process.

Do you use critique partners? No. I’m not in a critique group. It’s just me and my editor, Tracy Mack. I don’t have anyone who reads my work before she sees it.

Esperana-Rising-Cover-660x1024Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?  I’ve been working with Tracy at Scholastic for almost twenty years. There’s no one procedure for how we work. Every book has had its own idiosyncratic order of things. I usually discuss the story idea with her very early on, before I’ve ever written a word. When I know she’s on board and loves the idea, I start moving forward with the writing. I might write a treatment of the story to get a feel for the overarching plot. I might share that with her. Or, I might just start writing. Sometimes I’ve waited to show her a completed rough draft. Other times, I’ve shown her the first few chapters and given her a synopsis of the rest of the book. Different books have required different approaches. I would say though, that by the time she sees a complete first draft, I’ve rewritten over a dozen times. But as I mentioned before, it’s hard to gauge that. For me, rewriting is a constant and I can’t seem to separate it from the writing, or give it a number.

ECHO-medal-693x1024Echo, your latest novel, required you to balance storylines for several protagonists across several time periods and countries as well as an original fairy tale that opens and closes the book. I saw the white board in your office that you used to track the different storylines and main threads. Impressive! Did these extra efforts to harness the story during the original drafting reduce revision for this book compared to your other novels? Unfortunately, no, it did not reduce revision. But it helped me keep a lot of information straight. I tried using the computer program, Scribner, but it wasn’t a good fit for me and this book. So I tried the giant (7′ x 4′) freestanding white board. The revision on Echo, was very long. It’s almost a 600 pages! My editor and I knew the overarching organization of the book—three main stories and a transition story, framed by an original fairytale. All of the stories had to be woven with common threads. That’s where the white board came in. I could track, in one large visual, the leitmotifs, the recurring themes, words, phrases. I could see each character’s challenges and fears. Later in the editing process, after the big picture and the big themes were established, we broke it into sections. I would rewrite and fine-tune the first section, send it to her, and while she was editing it, I would work on the next section. We had many discussions and passed many notes back and forth.

Becoming-Naomi-Leon-Cover-650x1024How do you know you’ve got the final draft? Book manuscripts always want more. Putting them to bed is like putting a toddler to bed. You tuck them in and think that’s it, yet they want one more kiss, a drink of water, a song, the blanket fluffed, a night light. . . . Once I receive typeset pages, I know I won’t be making dramatic changes. After it goes to copyedit, I feel I’m almost done.

Thank you, Pam!

You can follow Pam on Twitter @pammunozryan. 

 

Welcome to DearEditor.com’s 2016 Revision Week!

/

Dear Readers…

I’m thrilled to announce DearEditor.com’s fourth annual Revision Week! Five best-selling and award-winning authors with 598 books among them sharing revision tips, insights, and been-there/done-that tales. Starting tomorrow, stop by each day for a new author interview and daily ‘Free Partial Edit by the Editor’ giveaways and one grand finale ‘Free Full Manuscript Edit by the Editor’ giveaway. Read the rest of today’s post to learn to learn about the authors participating…

Welcome to five days of free edit giveaways and revision advice and insights like these…


Pam Munoz RyanPam Munoz Ryan
, Newbery Honor-winning, bestselling author of 30 books for young readers: “Manuscripts always want more. Putting them to bed is like putting a toddler to bed. You tuck them in and think that’s it, yet they want one more kiss, a drink of water, a song, the blanket fluffed, a night light. . . .”

Screen Shot 2016-05-16 at 12.24.33 PMSalina Yoon, award-winning and bestselling author/illustrator of over 160 books for children: “I approach writing a story like solving a puzzle. Each piece is critical in telling the story.”

Chanel CleetonChanel Cleeton, popular author of four New Adult thriller and contemporary romance series: “I ALWAYS edit once on my computer, once on a printed draft, and once on an e-reader because changing formats always helps me to catch new things.”

Screen Shot 2016-05-16 at 12.30.48 PMJane Yolen, celebrated author of over 300 picture books, novels, and poetry collections for young people: “Literary multitasking keeps me on my toes and keeps me from getting stale.”

Marie ForceMarie Force, New York Times bestselling author of 50 contemporary romances: “I’m pretty ruthless when it comes to getting rid of the bloat and keeping my story zipping forward.”

 

Newsflash: 4th Annual DearEditor.com Revision Week May 30-June 3

/

Dear Readers…

Next week is the 4th Annual DearEditor.com Revision Week! Five best-selling and award-winning authors with 598 books among them will share their revision tips, insights, and tales from the trenches. There’s a new author interview each day, plus daily Free Partial Edit by The Editor giveaways and one grand finale Free Full Manuscript Edit by The Editor giveaway. Please read the rest of today’s post to see who these amazing authors will be.

The Editor

Every spring, DearEditor.com hosts celebrated, prolific authors for a week of inspirational interviews focused on their revision processes. Sharing their hard-earned wisdom about developing early drafts into polished finals this year:

  • Chanel Cleetonpopular author of New Adult thriller and contemporary romance series
  • Marie Force, New York Times bestselling author of contemporary romances
  • Pam Munoz Ryan, Newbery Honor-winning, bestselling author of books for young readers
  • Jane Yolen, heralded award-winning author of picture books, novels, and poetry collections for young people
  • Salina Yoonaward-winning and bestselling author/illustrator of books for children

Check out previous Revision Weeks at the Revision Week Archive.

Guest Editor Carter Higgins: How to Tackle a Big Revision

//

Dear Editor…

From a practical (logistical) standpoint, do you have any advice for how to tackle a large revision of a manuscript I haven’t read in over a year? I’ve just had it professionally edited. I’m thinking I’ll read through those edits, then print out the manuscript and read the whole thing. And make changes as I go? Or read it through once and then go through again and make changes? Or read it electronically and then make changes and then print it out? I just can’t decide quite how to approach it.

Sincerely,
J.

CarterHiggins1Carter Higgins has traveled a storyteller’s career path, from librarian to motion graphics designer and back to librarian. She is also the author of the middle grade novel A Rambler Steals Home (HMH, 2017) and the picture book Everything You Need for a Treehouse (Chronicle Books, 2017, illus. Emily Hughes).

Dear J….

I recently tackled a pretty large scale revision of my debut middle grade novel, A Rambler Steals Home. RAMBLERAnd when I say big, I mean big. Ultimately I rewrote approximately the first two-thirds of the novel, eliminated a beloved character, and changed a lot of intricately woven plot points which resulted in a domino effect through the pacing and structure of the entire thing. It’s a much better book thanks to the wisdom and vision of my editor, and the way I navigated her very thorough and very smart suggestions. Your mileage may vary with these steps, but this process helped me break down what seemed like an impossible and daunting task:

1. I cried. Not because I disagreed but because it was so overwhelming to even figure out how to begin. And not because I was intimidated, but because the warm fuzzy feelings of storytelling had to be replaced with good, hard work. I had to get ready for that.
2. I read my editor’s letter over and over and over again until I could feel it more. I took bulleted notes on it and rephrased chunks of it into my own words to really, truly understand what she was suggesting. I read it on my computer, I read it on my Kindle, and I read it on paper.
3. Then, I reread the current/old version of the manuscript in order to see it through the eyes of that editorial letter.
4. I identified what the story was really about—those were the parts that we were trying to heighten and tighten and strengthen, and made a loose outline of a new sequence of events to reach that goal.
5. Which for me, meant rewriting most of the story. Because I’d reread it before beginning this revision, I knew where I could pull chunks of words that I liked, even if I was re-crafting everything around it.
6. Finally, I read the manuscript again, start to finish, and immediately reread the edit letter. For me, it was all about feeling if I hit those points and less a checklist of sorts. After a couple of rounds of back and forth, once I felt like the draft breathed the same air as the letter (and when I was also happy with it!) I called that revision done.

– Carter

Put Interested Editors on Hold While Seeking Agent?

Dear Editor…

I want an agent and am ready to start submitting to agents. But there’s this: At a conference I got “special” permission from two editors to submit directly to them, bypassing their houses’ “no unsolicited submissions” policy. Should I submit to them first, wait, and then submit to agents? Or is it okay to submit to all at the same time? Would agents consider it a no-no that I’m submitting to two editors as well?

Sincerely,
Two Birds in the Hand

Dear Two Birds in the Hand…

Unless those editors required “exclusives,” submit to them and to agents simultaneously. Should one of the editors offer a contract before you sign with an agent, update the agents. They’ll likely review your submission quickly. (Of course, let the editor know you’re awaiting word from agents; he won’t yank the offer because of a few days’ wait.) Your new agent can step in to negotiate this contract, making her the agent of record and earning her the usual percentage of that book’s royalties. Sure, she didn’t work the submission phase, but she’ll get the most favorable contract terms for you at Book One. That’s worth her cut, and she’ll be able to field any rights opportunities (or publication problems) that arise in the life of the book. Plus, you’ll be working together fully from the beginning. If the two editors decline, any agent you get down the line will want their names so she won’t bark up those same trees. There are valid concerns about using up opportunities by self-submitting to editors, but you’re only talking about two editors. I’d go for it.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Winner! Thank You for Celebrating 20 Years With Me

/

Dear Readers…

It’s a privilege to be able to celebrate my 20th anniversary by giving back to the community that embraced me on Day One. I’m happy to announce the winner of last week’s “Free Full Manuscript Edit” giveaway: Julie Falatko.

Happy writing!
The Editor

On my first day as an editorial assistant with Harcourt Children’s Books, the managing editor walked me down the hall to view an art show of newly arrived paintings for a picture book then in production. I stood among a bustling crowd of editors, designers, production people, marketing gurus, and inventory, financial, legal, and support staff—all of whom had dedicated their careers and personal passions to creating entertaining and enlightening books for children—and it hit me: I’d found my people. I discovered that day what I’ve come to love about the writers and producers of children’s books: They are a true community that cheers, collaborates, and works its knuckles to the bones in support of literature for young readers.”

That’s how I described my first day in children’s publishing for my acknowledgments in Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. That pivotal day was twenty yours ago this month. Thank you for celebrating this milestone with me.

Giveaway Winner announced

Dear Readers…

Thank you for celebrating my good news with me. WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION was a pleasure to write, and I’m pleased that the San Diego Book Award committee finds it worthy of their honor. I’m especially thrilled to have heard from so many of you that it’s been a useful addition to your writing life. Mission accomplished! And now for the winner of the Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway: Congratulations, Serene Heiner!

Happy writing to all!
The Editor

I’ve sent Serene an email and look forward to hearing about her project. I send the rest of us into the new week with a powerful statement from this month’s SCBWI Summer Conference:

“Surround yourself with people who are going to cheer you on.” –Kwame Alexander, Newbery Medalist

Hear, hear!

ALERT: Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway!

/

Dear Readers…

You know I love to celebrate milestones and good news by paying it forward. This week I’m celebrating WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION winning a San Diego Book Award by giving away a FREE FULL MANUSCRIPT EDIT. Read today’s announcement post for details and the Rafflecopter entry form.

Good luck!
The Editor

This Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway is for picture book writers or any novelist—of MG, YA, NA, or Adult fiction—who has a completed manuscript of 110,000 words or less. Use the Rafflecopter form below to enter. The contest is open to entries August 10, 2015 – August 14, 2015. I’ll announce the winner August 15, 2015, here on this blog and on DearEditor.com’s Facebook, Google+, and Twitter pages. [NOTE: If you’re viewing this on your desktop or laptop, use the scroll bar at the right to see the full Rafflecopter entry instructions for the Facebook and Twitter extra entry options, which have two steps. Mobile devices DO show the full entry form for those options. For the next DearEditor.com giveaway, I’ll have a redesigned page to avoid such issues. Thanks!]

Happy writing!
The Editor

a Rafflecopter giveaway

Making the Dream Happen

Dear Readers…

Today’s is a special post—an update from a DearEditor.com reader who feared the dream of being a Writer was unattainable due to struggles with a mental illness that saps self-confidence. You supported JC with your comments, your suggestions, and your own stories of struggling for your dreams. With JC’s permission, then, I share with you the note that made my day.

The Editor

 

 

Dear Editor…

Just wanted to update you on the progress of my non-fiction book. I decided to write a book about my experiences with a mental illness, which has been the basis of two questions I’ve submitted to you before (one on writing when you have a mental illness and another about word count intimidation).

Well, last week I managed to pass the 40,000-word mark of the first draft. That was important to me because I’ve held that figure of 40,000 to 60,000 words for a Young Adult Novel in my head as the goal I need to work towards. Obviously, I know that fiction is going to be much more difficult than factual content based on my experiences, but before this project, I hadn’t written anything more than five or six thousand words.

I’m currently using a blank document to write anything new so the scale of the main document (running at over 70 single-spaced pages now) doesn’t overwhelm me, and I’m just taking every day as it comes. I still have quite a bit more I want to say, but I take every word as a bonus now and I hope that reaching such a milestone offers hope that I’ll be able to achieve such a word count when I come to tackle my first Young Adult Novel. It still worries me that I won’t though.

Anyway, I just wanted to update you on my progress. I never thought I’d reach 40,000 words, it’s just such a large number. I’m going to keep writing though as if I’m writing on a blank document and I’ll just have to see how high that word count goes, whilst keeping in mind the quality of what I’m writing.

JC

Newsflash: Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway

/

Dear Readers…

You know I’ve got a blog tour going on, but you don’t know I’m giving away a FREE FULL MANUSCRIPT EDIT as part of the tour because I forgot to tell you. (Editor smacks forehead.) You can visit any of the great blogs on the tour to enter that tour-wide giveaway as well as to enter their individual giveaways or read my guest posts, or you can go to Rafflecopter to enter the free edit giveaway directly. I want you to have a shot at that.

Good luck!
The Editor

Writing New Adult Fiction Blog Tour Stops

NA Alley “Guest Post: 4 Steps for Writing a Tantalizing Hook (and Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway + Free Signed Book Giveaway)”
Quirk And Quill review & free book giveaway
Coffee and characters spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway
KIDLIT411 author interview & book giveaway
My Book Fairy “Guest Post: NA Writers Have Storytelling Needs, Too (And Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway)”
–  Writing Belle “Guest Post: What Is the Future of New Adult Fiction? (And Book Giveaway)
Fiction Notes “Guest Post: 3 Ways to Know If Your YA Is Really New Adult fiction (And Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway)”
It’s a Matter of Moments review, free manuscript giveaway
Hot Guys in Books review, free manuscript giveaway, free book giveaway
Blogcritics review
Christy Herself! book spotlight & giveaway
Book Bumblings interview & giveaway
Agent Jill Corcoran’s blog “Guest Post: What’s the difference between ‘new’ adult and ‘young’ adult? PLUS a contest!”
Agent Erzsi Deak’s Hen and Ink Blots New Adult: “Sexed” up YA or Bona Fide Literary Movement? An interview with Deborah Halverson, author of Writing NA Fiction”
KC Maguire blog interview & giveaway
WriteforKids video interview
Country Gals Sexy Reads spotlight
Prone to Crushes on Boys in Books spotlight
A Book Addict’s Delight book spotlight & giveaway
eBook Addict review & free manuscript edit giveaway
A One-click Addict’s Book Blog spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway
Deal sharing aunt spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway
Short and Sassy Book Blurbs spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway

BLOG TOUR: Writing New Adult Fiction

WritingNewAdultFiction

Writer’s Digest Books, ISBN 978-1-59963-800-3
Amazon | B&N | IndieBound | Goodreads | Writer’s Digest Books

Thanks for your support of the blog tour celebrating the publication of Writing New Adult Fiction! You can read all the fun and informative interviews and guest blog posts by The Editor – covering craft, promotion, and the business of publishing New Adult fiction by clicking on the links below.

NA Alley blog:Four Steps for Writing a Tantalizing Hook for Your Book Excerpt from review: “An amazing resource, specifically for New Adult writers.” Excerpt from guest post: “Work through those and you’ve got your hook. Informative, tantalizing, and concise—even Tweetable in its entirety if you can really pare it down. Put it on your back cover, use it to lead your e-retailer descriptions, throw it into social media play, use it at conferences or when networking one-on-one. Hook in hand, now it’s time to tell the world about your story.

My Book Fairy blog: “NA Writers Have Storytelling Needs, Too (and Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway)” Excerpt: “Each group of storytellers may tap into the same foundational elements like plot and dialogue and characterization, but they use them to tell different kinds of stories for different audiences with different needs—and those differences deserve our attention. I set out to write a book that can support and guide NA writers.

Fiction Notes blog:3 Ways to Know If Your YA Is Really New Adult fiction (And Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway)” Excerpt: “[Writers say,] ‘Tell me what NA is, Deborah, and then I’ll know what I’ve got.’ Happy to help! Here are three ways to determine if you’re writing a story about a young adult or a new adult.”

Writing Belle blog: What Is the Future of New Adult Fiction? (And Book Giveaway)” Excerpt from review: “A fantastic how-to.” Excerpt from guest post: “As we move into NA’s future, then, I expect we’ll see a wider range of storylines, settings, and genres that explore every aspect of the new adult experience, and we’ll expand the NA audience as a result.”

It’s a Matter of Moments blog review & free book/manuscript edit giveaway: Excerpt: “A masterpiece to budding new adult writers like us…. If we had more space, we could showcase useful tools and nuggets of wisdom in every chapter, but you will be much better served to get your own copy and discover the magic yourself. Writers: GO GET THIS BOOK!

Quirk & Quill blog: review & free book giveaway: Excerpt from review: “I became a huge fan of her how-to-write-YA book, WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES. It is my number one go-to-craft-writing-resource in the courses I teach at UC Berkeley and Stanford.… Like she does in her YA writing craft book, [Deborah] breaks down just what you need and want to know about writing NA fiction in the same clear manner with full engagement.”

Coffee and Characters blog: spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway: Excerpt from review: “Stock full or information and a worth while read!”

eBook Addict review & free manuscript edit giveaway: Excerpt from review: “If you’re a writer, and you want to try your hand at writing new adult, I strongly suggest reading this novel!

Blogcritics review: “With her conversational, engaging style, Halverson demystifies the process of plotting, writing, and marketing a NA novel…. If you’re serious about writing a NA novel you can be proud of, one that is also marketable, you’ll add this indispensable title to your permanent reference shelf.

KIDLit411 interview & free book giveaway  Excerpt: “Figure out how to get past any fears you have and just go for it. That’s what got me writing that first novel, and that’s what gets me past the infamous Blank Page with every new project. Be bold. And then stay bold, because publishing isn’t just writing—it’s about writing for others…. Everyone has opinions—use the positive and contructive feedback to bolster yourself and then build on your strengths.”

Hot Guys in Books review & free book/manuscript edit giveaways: Excerpt: “This book is awesome! It’s so seamlessly written so following her is no problem. The book it thorough in every aspect. It explains from what New Adult Fiction is to how to publish your book. I learned so much from it. I really didn’t know how to define the genre of New Adult until this book. I’m not exaggerating when I say it made me EXCITED to write because know I have a more clear idea of what others are expecting.This book will definitely be referenced multiple times when I’m writing my novel.

Christy Herself! spotlight: Stop in to enter the tourwide free manuscript edit giveaway!

Book Bumblings Interview & giveaway  Excerpt: “I believe traditional publishers will help curate NA titles for those readers who need curation, and they will be there for those writers who want a partnership that brings greater promo/distribution opportunities and professional expertise, but ultimately the independent writers will continue running the NA show.”

Literary Agent Jill Corcoran’s blog: “What’s the difference between ‘new’ adult and ‘young’ adult? PLUS a contest!” Excerpt: “What’s the difference between ‘new’ adult and ‘young’ adult? My answer usually starts with a single word: sensibility.

Literary Agent Erzsi Deak’s Hen and Ink Blots blog: New Adult: “Sexed” up YA or Bona Fide Literary Movement? An interview with Deborah Halverson, author of Writing NA Fiction. Excerpt: “If you know you have a great story, and you just haven’t made that connection with a big audience yet, for whatever reason, you can keep submitting and not hurt yourself by self-publishing. The only way you can hurt yourself is if you do it poorly and you get bad reviews, because that cannot be erased.”

KC Maguire blog: “Deborah Halverson: Author Interview and Giveaway.Excerpt: “Craft stories that build up sexual anticipation through love denied, teased, and toyed with. A much-anticipated kiss can be more dramatically powerful than a perfunctory graphic groping.”

WriteforKids website video interview: Excerpt: “New Adult Fiction, with characters age 18-25, is exploding. But what, exactly, is New Adult, and how is it different from writing for young adults? Deborah Halverson, explains the ins and outs of NA in this interview.

Country Gals Sexy Reads spotlight: Excerpt: “5 of 5 stars… Halverson, puts everything into perspective and you will gain confidence if there is a closet writer within you.”

Prone to Crushes on Boys in Books spotlight and giveaway

A Book Addict’s Delight spotlight and giveaway

A One-Click Addict’s Book Blog spotlight & free manuscript giveaway

Deal Sharing Aunt spotlight & free manuscript giveaway

Short and Sassy Book Blurbs spotlight & free manuscript edit giveaway

WritingNewAdultFiction

Writer’s Digest Books, ISBN 978-1-59963-800-3
Amazon | B&N | IndieBound | Goodreads | Writer’s Digest Books

 

How Come If I Stay’s Opening Works?

///

Dear Readers…

Last week a writer—Diane—asked me why some current bestsellers that start with backstory or as the day is dawning can make those slower beginnings work so well? She specifically asked about The Fault in Our Stars and If I Stay. I posted my answer about The Fault in Our Stars last week. I think this is such a useful exploration of story beginnings that I’m taking up that same question today, this time parsing out If I Stay‘s opening.

The Editor

Dear Diane…

Gayle Forman’s If I Stay opens with what looks like a no-no: the protagonist joins her family for breakfast and they discuss plans for the day. Too often such “dawning day” openings just introduce the protagonist and show her “home base” as a reference point before she leaves for adventure. A strong opening doesn’t just introduce and ground—it intrigues readers in ways that prompt further reading. Forman intrigues by triggering and stoking anticipation. Her chapter header is “7:09 a.m.”, setting up the expectation that a big thing will happen any minute. Then the first two sentences tell us some big “it” is pending. Next, the family debates whether to stay off the icy roads. By then, readers—who know they’ve chosen a book about a girl deciding to live or die after she’s the only survivor of her family’s car crash—have their metaphoric hands over their eyes, thinking, “No! Stay home!” Forman stokes anticipation even as she shows the loving family her protagonist will lose, setting up the heroine’s emotional anguish. Dawning day, yes, but that dawn is loaded.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Thank You, and See You in a Week!

//

Dear Readers…

Thank you for joining me to celebrate the publication of Writing New Adult Fiction, and congratulations to Devanie on winning yesterday’s grand finale Full Manuscript Edit giveaway. We’ll take week off from DearEditor.com updates in your inbox, then I’ll be back with the regular Q-and-A—starting with a writer who wants to know what makes “bestsellers that begin with backstory, like The Fault in Our Stars,” work in an age when in media res is the magic phrase.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Writing New Adult Fiction

Foreword by Sylvia Day

“For the writer who wants to become a new adult author, or the new adult author who seeks to enrich her craftsmanship and stand out from the herd.”Tammara Webber, New York Times best-selling author of Easy and Breakable

WritingNewAdultFictionA guide for writers of New Adult fiction, featuring essential information and techniques for creating engaging stories featuring 18- to 25-year-old protagonists against the backdrop of the new adult experience. Includes advice on self-publishing in the NA marketplace and self-marketing. Find insights from best-selling NA authors as well as editors and agents.

WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION Launch Week, Grand Finale: Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway

//

Dear Readers…

It’s here—the final day of Writing New Adult Fiction Launch Week. Today, a few words of thanks and the grand finale giveaway: a Free Full Manuscript Edit.

Good luck!
The Editor

*Scroll down to enter the “Free Full Manuscript Edit” giveaway. Congratulations to the winner of yesterday’s free critique giveaway, Beth Hull!

Sylvia DayIn picking up Writing New Adult Fiction, you, too, are turning to a new page in your writing career…. Take what you learn in the pages that follow, then adapt the knowledge to suit your story and style. Let the information work for you. Learn the rules so you can break them. You will lead your New Adult characters on a similar journey of discovery and adaptation. It’s a path we can all relate to, which is why the genre resonates with so many readers, regardless of age or background.”–Sylvia Day, from her foreword for Writing New Adult Fiction

Tammara WebberThis book is more than a marketing guide, more than a writing manual, more than a compilation of stories about successful authors. For the writer who wants to become a new adult author, or the new adult author who seeks to enrich her craftsmanship and stand out from the herd, this book has an abundance of information.Tammara Webber, from the cover of Writing New Adult Fiction

I thank Sylvia and Tammara for believing in my efforts to help NA writers, and everyone who contributed illuminating sidebar features to the book, like cover designer Robin Ludwig, who talks about book covers in her feature “Author Branding Through Cover Design.” And Marsal Lyon Literary Agency’s Kevan Lyon, who explains how an agent knows when she’s got something special in her hands in her feature “What It Means to Look for ‘Fresh’.” And author Alana Albertson, who walks us through the creation of an audiobook in her feature “Beyond the Book: Creating Your Own Audiobook.” I’m honored that these experts are helping me extend this book beyond the writing process so it can help writers through every phase of publishing.

These other authors, agents, editors, and industry insiders also allowed me to pick their brains and then pepper their wisdoms throughout the book: Jennifer L. Armentrout (writing NA fiction as J. Lynn), Amanda Bergeron, Carrie Butler, Jill Corcoran, Jaycee DeLorenzo, Kristina DeMichele, Stacey Donaghy, Karen Grove, Juliana Haygert, L.G. Kelso, Summer Lane, Trisha Leigh (writing NA fiction as Lyla Payne), Molly McAdams, Jen McConnel, Sara Megibow, Lynn Rush (also writing as Resse Monroe), Victoria H. Smith, Brooklyn Skye, Nicole Steinhaus, Denise Grover Swank, Suzie Townsend, Dan Weiss, and E.J. Wesley.

My thanks to you, too, for joining my week-long celebration. I hope you found some useful insights. To blow the final horn on this party, I’m giving away a full manuscript edit. It’s open to any novelist—of YA, NA, or Adult fiction—who has a completed manuscript of 110,000 words or less. Use the Rafflecopter form below to enter. I’ll announce the winner tomorrow, here and on DearEditor.com’s Facebook, Google+, and Twitter pages.

Happy writing!
The Editor

a Rafflecopter giveaway

WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION Launch Week, Day 4: Revising in the Speed-Driven NA Market

//

Dear Readers…

Here we are at Day 4 of Writing New Adult Fiction Launch Week. Today, the last “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway and advice for revising your NA manuscript. Tomorrow, the grand finale “Free Full Manuscript Edit” giveaway….

Happy reading!
The Editor

*Scroll down to enter today’s “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway. Congratulations to yesterday’s winner, Whitney Sostarich!

The revision part of the process takes longer than the initial writing. The writing usually comes very quickly, then the revision will take two to three times longer than the first draft.” –Sylvia Day, international bestselling author and former president of Romance Writers of America, from Writing New Adult Fiction

NA writers feel great pressure to publish fast. Readers clamoring for the next book in your series, market opportunities feeling so “now, now, now!”, self-publishing technology reducing production cycles to nanoseconds, and other NA authors cranking out book after book after book so shouldn’t you be, too?

No. Take a breath. Now blow that frenzied feeling out of your body and take control. Refuse to be pushed into going out as fast as you can with the quickest story you can write. Publishing success isn’t measured in how fast you go from idea to publication—it’s measured in readers so satisfied with the reading experience you crafted that they want to share it with their friends and then buy more. Those readers would prefer you take longer to write a great next book than publish just-okay stuff fast. Do you want to see 3-star reviews of your books that say, “It was okay, but it felt rushed,” or do you want 4- and 5-star reviews that say, “I loved it and you will, too!”? Allow yourself the extra time you need to revise. Don’t let outside forces determine when you say, “Done!”

And I’m not just talking line tweaks. I mean evaluating the entire manuscript—scenes, character arcs, all of it—and committing to fixing any weaknesses you identify. Revision is a powerful writing tool. Every spring DearEditor.com dedicates a week to interviews with prolific award-winners and bestsellers to examine their revision processes. Click here to hear how 19 writers with 500+ books between them tackle revision and still publish voluminously.

So of course I wrote a big ol’ chapter about revising for Writing New Adult Fiction, keeping NA needs in mind. Here are two important elements you can assess when it’s time to evaluate your NA manuscript for revision:

  • Check your settings for NA appeal and freshness: 60% of Americans go straight to college from high school. If you’ve got a campus setting, have you set the scenes in uncommon campus spaces to make the familiar feel fresh? Get your characters out of the campus beer garden and into the on-campus bowling alley, with all the noises, weird lighting, and interruptions that come with that. Instead of meeting the hot guy in the class doorway, have Mr. Hottie offer your gal a ride to her car in a crowded parking structure so he can get a space. Parking was the bane of my college experience, so I muted my parents’ warnings about getting into cars with strangers. Sound like a new adult risk-taker to you? Did you work your setting against your new adult’s concerns and social mindset? How about her work spaces and party places? Does your new adult’s living space reflect this transitory time of life? Does her new “home” force her to face things she thought she’d left behind with Mom and Dad? Do your setting choices expose deep truths about your characters and make them as comfortable or uncomfortable as you need them to be?
  • Confirm that you have new adult undertones: Does your NA protagonist have high expectations for herself that don’t always match reality? Is she experimental, does she take risks? Is she working on self-accountability? Is your character still assessing her Life Plan or has she settled into it? Have you challenged that commitment, putting the screws to her thumbs so that she truly examines the box she’s building for herself? Did you get in there and rock her stability? No fiction writer should let their character stand on solid ground for long—problems beget conflict and pressured choices, conflict and pressured choices beget further problems—but it’s especially true for your NA fiction because new adults are in such a hypersensitive, unstable state.

Use the Rafflecopter form below to enter today’s “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway. NA, YA, Adult… any fiction WIP is okay. (And you’re still eligible for the Friday Full MS edit giveaway, too.) Good luck!

 

a Rafflecopter giveaway

WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION Launch Week, Day 3: NA Lit and Multiple Points of View

//

Dear Readers…

Welcome to Day 3 of Writing New Adult Fiction Launch Week. Today, a “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway, advice for deciding if your NA fiction should have multiple narrators, tips for smooth POV switching, and a peek at author Molly McAdams’s efforts to coax a voice from a new narrator in Book Two of her bestselling Taking Chances series.

Hope you find it informative!
The Editor

*Scroll down to enter today’s giveaway. Congratulation’s to yesterday’s winner, Kimberly Durtschi!

Using multiple narrators to tell your story from different points of view is a popular and fun storytelling device in New Adult literature. Multiple POVs are great for injecting conflict by having two characters report the same event differently (with neither one lying!), for causing conflict by having two characters process the same event to different ends and requiring different actions, for allowing readers to connect intimately with multiple characters, for working in information that a single narrator couldn’t know, and for providing alternate insights or opinions. But there are risks if you mishandle your multiple POVs. Switching from character to character can distract or jolt your readers or stutter your story’s momentum. Or, your efforts to connect readers with multiple characters can overwhelm those readers—and you. You may use multiple narrators in a single book, or you can switch narrators from book to book within a series.

Molly McAdams, the author of the New Adult contemporary romance series Taking Chances and Forgiving Lies, weighs in on the challenge of making sure a sequel with a new POV covers new ground in her Writing New Adult Fiction special feature “Author Insight: Giving Chase a Voice”:

molly mcadams taking chances“The times when I was mirroring Taking Chances [book 1], Chase was difficult—he’d hide in the background, and I could picture him smirking at me, saying, ‘This isn’t my story.’ But the second I’d veer away into the parts we hadn’t seen before, the parts that made  Stealing Harper [book 2] so different, it was as if I’d been holding him back while he’d been screaming at me to tell his story, and now that I’d started, there was no stopping until it was all out. He finally had a voice, and he was using it.”

As Molly’s experience makes clear, switching narrators is most powerful when each narrator can contribute something new to the story—new insights, information, or opinions—rather than simply offer a second voice. This is especially important if you’re covering scenes that readers already witnessed through another narrator (“mirroring”). The switching should add depth, not just pages. Otherwise you’re just rehashing the same scene, making the POV shifts feel repetitive rather than revelatory.

Are multiple POVs right for your NA lit? No device should be used just because it’s popular; plenty of great NAs use single POV. When considering your story’s POV, ask yourself…

  • Who is the best character(s) to tell this story?
  • What will an additional perspective add to the story? Can I show readers what’s going on in the other character’s head through his actions, body language, dialogue, and choices instead?
  • Can each character consistently bring new information to the story to make the switching rewarding for readers?
  • Do my readers need to know what’s going on in that other character’s mind? In real life, we can’t know exactly what’s going on in our closest friends’ heads. Miscommunication stems from that blind spot, and miscommunication is a novelist’s friend.

If you decide that multiple narrators are best for your NA fiction, go for it! Here are tips for smooth, strategic POV shifts…

  • Give the narrators vastly different voices and outlooks on life.
  • Trade narrators at scene or chapter breaks rather than mid-scene, reducing jolts or pacing stutters.
  • Be consistent about switching, establishing a rhythm or pattern that you can strategically break for powerful dramatic deviation.
  • Use the switching as a tension-increasing device, timing some switches to create cliffhangars as you temporarily deny readers the information, insights, or reactions they crave.
  • Clarify the switches. You could write one narrative in present tense, another in past; use first person (I, me) for one, and third person (he, she, they) for the other; or use the narrators’ names as the chapter titles.

Don’t be afraid to experiment and find the perfect mix of POV strategies for your NA lit. A few days of experimentation pay off big time when you end up with the perfect balance for your story.

Use the Rafflecopter form below to enter today’s “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway. NA, YA, Adult… any fiction WIP is okay. (And you’re still eligible for the Friday Full MS edit giveaway, too.) Good luck!

a Rafflecopter giveaway

WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION Launch Week, Day 2: Manipulating New Adult Characters

///

Dear Readers…

It’s Day 2 of Writing New Adult Fiction Launch Week! Today, a “Free Chapter Critique” giveaway and tips for manipulating new adults with their own universal traits.

Thanks for joining me!
The Editor

*Scroll down to enter today’s “Free First Chapter Critique” giveaway. Congratulations to yesterday’s winner, Kari Palm.

Yesterday I pointed out some social, emotional, and circumstantial traits of new adulthood. There are many great ways to manipulate your NA characters using those insights. Here are five:

  1. Force your new adult characters to reject or accept their childhoods. They’re no longer defined by their family’s circumstances or the fallout from parents’ decisions. They’ve got a clean slate—or so they think. Inside, they’re still lugging baggage, and that baggage needs to be handled. A variation of this has characters working through the scars of a tough teen experience, such as a physical attack.
  2. Make your protagonists question their self-reliance. They craved independence, but now that they have it, can they handle it? Perhaps threaten parental input—or yank it away if your young people use their parents as a crutch.
  3. Embrace the complications of forging a new social circle. In a way, your new adults are picking a new “family.” Don’t give them a cast of ideal choices.
  4. Make money an issue. Financial stress can be harsh, especially when you’re new to financial independence. “In YA the characters may be working at Starbucks for extra pocket money, whereas NA characters have to make money to survive, so the stresses on the characters are much greater. They can’t just blow it off.”—Agent Stacey Donaghy (quoted from Writing New Adult Fiction)
  5. Explore mental issues. Sadly, this is an age range in which many mental issues are triggered or come to fruition amid the stress. Mental and social issues are a part of our collective literary landscape, as themes and contributing to conflict and impacting both the internal and external journeys of characters. It’s an option, if not for your protagonist then for the people in her life who she may have to support with her newfound strengths and wisdoms.

All five of these manipulation strategies are, at their cores, about rocking your new adults’ stability. Remember, new adulthood is a time of change, with just about every element of their lives in some sort of transition. Good or bad, change is stressful, and stress leads to high emotions and conflict and bad decisions. Regardless of the genre you’re writing, if you wrap all that stress in your NA characters’ heightened emotions and then tie that up in a puffy bow of high expectations for an “ideal new adult experience,” you’re looking at a fiction gold mine. Mine it to the hilt!

Use the Rafflecopter form below to enter today’s “Free 1st 20 Pages Critique” giveaway. NA, YA, Adult… any fiction WIP is okay. (And you’re still eligible for the Friday Full MS edit giveaway, too.) Good luck!

a Rafflecopter giveaway

NEWSFLASH! Free Edit Giveaways During Launch Week Aug 25-29

//

Dear Readers…

I encourage writers to celebrate their writing milestones. Today my new book Writing New Adult Fiction releases and I’m celebrating with a week of daily “Partial Edit” giveaways and a grand finale “Full Manuscript Edit” giveaway starting Monday. I’ll also share tips for crafting riveting New Adult Fiction, some of the sidebar wisdoms contributed to the book by bestselling NA authors, editors, agents, and cover designers, and other fun stuff like that. Join me for this 5-day virtual book launch August 25-29. And if you’re free, stop by #NAlitchat tonight on Twitter 9pmEST to talk all things NA.

Party time!
The Editor

Writing New Adult Fiction

Foreword by Sylvia Day

“For the writer who wants to become a new adult author, or the new adult author who seeks to enrich her craftsmanship and stand out from the herd.”Tammara Webber, New York Times best-selling author of Easy and Breakable

WritingNewAdultFictionA guide for writers of New Adult fiction, featuring essential information and techniques for creating engaging stories featuring 18- to 25-year-old protagonists against the backdrop of the new adult experience. Includes advice on self-publishing in the NA marketplace and self-marketing. Find insights from best-selling NA authors as well as editors and agents.

What Is “New Adult Fiction”?

//

Dear Editor…

The “New Adult Fiction” category has recently entered the publishers lexicon. Please enlighten us by defining.

Thanks,
Peter

Dear Peter…

New Adult fiction explores the hearts and minds of 18- to 25-year-olds as they learn to live self-responsible lives. Its readers are believed to be those 18- to 25-year-olds, plus the 30- to 44-year-old crossover readers who love Young Adult fiction. The dominant genres of this category, which fits the gap between YA and fiction for adults, are contemporary romance and paranormal. But similar to YA’s expansion beyond stories of love and angst in high school, readers are calling for expanded NA fare such as thrillers, mysteries, or any adventure that can befall someone after graduation from high school or an adult-regulated life but before settling into marriage, career, and family. And authors are writing it. NA imprints include Entangled Embrace and Bloomsbury Spark, but NA does appear in YA and adult fiction imprints or is self-published. I’ll cover NA themes and sensibilities here in August, when I do a week of NA-centric posts and free edit giveaways to celebrate my new book Writing New Adult Fiction, which has insights from NA bestsellers and a foreword by Sylvia Day.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Revision Week: Winner and Week Off

Dear Readers…

I hope you enjoyed DearEditor.com’s third annual Revision Week. I created this event to bring you insights and inspiration as you work through the ups and downs of revision, and. I’m honored that five talented authors helped me do that. Thanks to them and to you for joining in with your comments, and congrats to the giveaway winners, including Rachel Stones, winner of yesterday’s Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway. If you haven’t had your fill of revision insights, click here for the Revision Week Archive. And now I shall take a breather for a week, returning on May 19 to the usual format, with answers to the craft and industry questions you wonder about. Until then…

Happy revising!
The Editor

The Editor is grateful for the authors who made Revision Week 2014 informative, inspiring, and fun. In case you missed any of the interviews, here are the direct links:

Marla Frazee, two-time Caldecott Honor-winning picture book author/illustrator. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6117

Jean Ferris, award-winning author of nineteen young adult novels. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6174

Joni Rodgers, best-selling novelist and ghostwriter. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6202

Warren Fahy, best-selling author of science-based thrillers. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6227

Denise Grover Swank, best-selling author of YA, NA, and novels for adults. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6244

More fabulous interviews in the Revision Week Archive.

Revision Week: Denise Grover Swank

Dear Readers…

We put the exclamation point on Revision Week with prolific Denise Grover Swank, the bestselling author of mysteries, paranormal, romance, and thrillers for young adults, new adults, and regular ol’ grown-up adults.

Today also brings us to the grand finale giveaway: the Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Read the full post for giveaway details and Denise’s interview.

 

Denise Grover SwankDenise Grover Swank is the New York Times and USA Today bestselling author of nearly twenty novels, including mysteries, paranormal and urban fantasies, rom-coms, and thrillers for young adults, new adults, and adults, and various short stories. Denise’s two newest books—Business as Usual, the third book in the bestselling Off the Subject series, and The Curse Breakers, the second book in the Curse Keepers series, just released last month. Her Thirty-Two and a Half Complications, the fifth book in her popular Rose Gardner Mysteries series, comes out next month. And if that’s not enough to impress you, how about this: Denise does all this writing while raising six amazing children.

*Denise’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form for today’s Free Full Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
500x750_28Wishes-200x300I’m never one hundred percent happy with a first draft, but I’ve had a couple among my seventeen books that I felt really good about and made only a few changes in revision. I finished a book last month that took about five passes with significant changes before I was happy with it. It’s not unusual for me to write a first draft and then cut one-third to half the book out and start over again. I usually know what’s wrong with the book when I’m finished, and when I send it to my awesome developmental editor—Angela Polidoro—I send her a list of my perceived issues, and she always agrees and then adds her own. But when I chop the book up and add to it, I’m usually pretty happy with the changes and only make minor changes in a third pass.

the-curse-breakers-cover-200x300Do you use critique partners?
I used to use critique partners when I first started writing and into the second year after I started publishing, but I’m too prolific for my partners to keep up. At this point, I only use a developmental editor along with three to five beta readers between developmental edits and line edits. But when I first started, I had three trusted critique partners and we made developmental suggestions along with line edits. My last remaining crit partner and I are too busy to give a full critique—and we pay people to do it—so we now beta read for each other when we have the time.

sacrifice-600x900-72dpi-200x300Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?
I send my first draft to my developmental editor. I hired a developmental editor with my fifth book—Sacrifice—and when she suggested I send the first draft, I was beyond horrified. SEND HER MY FIRST DRAFT??? But she said there was no sense editing words I was only going to cut, and she was right.

So when my first editor took a job that made her unavailable, I worked with new developmental editor and was again HORRIFIED. I’m more comfortable with it now because she knows I can take a very crappy first draft and pull a fantastic book out before it’s done.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
I send my first draft to Angela. She takes a week to go through it a couple of times and sends her notes. Then I do my major revision—chopping out major portions and rewriting or adding—and also clean up the writing—sentence structure. I usually budget three to four weeks for this. And then I send it back to her for line edits.

New-BAU_Small-193x300Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?
Wow. You know, when you’re in the middle of a block, you wonder how in the world you’ll get out of it, but at this point—seventeen books later—I trust it will come. I usually binge-watch Netflix and an idea/solution will come to me out of nowhere. I think the key—for me anyway—is to think about something else for a while.

My last book—The Curse Defiers—is the hardest book I’ve written to date. [Editor’s note: Pubbing September 2014.] It’s the one that took five major revision passes to complete. I sold the book to my publisher as a series but they chose to call it a trilogy after I had written the second book. I honestly had no idea how to wrap everything up in one book without making a complete mess of it. I still plan to continue the series with at least three more books, but obviously I had to wrap up some major issues for readers to be satisfied with a “trilogy.” Several plot lines stumped me and I wrote it only to decide it sucked and so rewrote it, then changed it completely and rewrote it again.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?
Other than The Curse Defiers, I cut off the entire first half of my book Sacrifice and rewrote it in three weeks and blended and smoothed it into the second half, which took major changes.

Here_normal1-213x300How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
With my deadlines, I know when it’s time to send it to my editor. LOL. That being said, I won’t publish it if I don’t think it’s ready. Beta readers help determine that, along with a gut feeling that it’s right.

Thanks so much, Denise! I was fascinated to hear the nuts and bolts of your process.

Revision Week: Warren Fahy

Dear Readers…

We’ve reached the penultimate day of Revision Week. Today I talk revision with Warren Fahy, bestselling author of thriller fiction. Of Warren’s international bestseller Fragment, author James Rollins says, “Think Jurassic Park on steroids.”

Please join Warren and The Editor for Day 4 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Warren_FahyxWarren Fahy has been a bookseller, editor, and a lead writer for Rockstar Games’s Red Dead Revolver and WowWee Robotics. His bestselling thriller Fragment, nominated for a BSFA and an International Thriller Award, was the subject of a bidding war at the London Book Fair and has been published in eighteen countries and optioned for film. Fragment has been widely compared to the works of Michael Crichton and James Rollins. His thrillers include The Kor and Pandemonium, the sequel to Fragment. Warren and I met many years ago, when we both worked as editors for an information publisher. At the time, he was writing his first manuscripts on the side and I was months away from my first job in trade publishing, with Harcourt Children’s Books. It is with complete delight that I share Warren’s insights on revision with you today.

*Warren’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form for today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for his full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
fragment_usa_pbxxI take care of character and story choices in the outline stage so I know and have that worked out in advance before I begin drafting the actual novel. Then I like to take at least 12 passes at the manuscript itself before I feel it’s road-tested enough.

You do a lot of research for your fiction, which heavily incorporates real science. How does researching fit into your writing and revising process?
I generally start with some idea that has in part been inspired by research, then research that idea to see what precedents exist for it in nature, science, or technology. At that point it becomes a back and forth, and often new research pops up along the way that either causes a problem (in which case I have to make adjustments) or supports the story, in which case I find a place suitable to mention it. Also, I run the manuscript past some science consultants to get their input, which is often invaluable.

PrintDo you use critique partners or advance readers?
I do. I have four or five people I run a manuscript by a few times before the process is done. Wherever they stop reading a manuscript, I fix it so that nobody wants to stop there again. I pay attention to what they don’t say as much as to what they do say.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft? I submit the final draft and there is relatively little editing done by the editor. It is always best to deliver a final product and not a work in progress to an editor. In the case of Pandemonium, my editor, Bob Gleason at Tor, said, “it’s good to go” and so it skipped the editorial and went straight to the copy-editing/proofing stage.

Pandemonium_hardbackxCan you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did? Well, it’s all problem-solving, of course. You design the story from the beginning to avoid insoluble problems, ideally. But one interesting problem I had with Pandemonium was that the male protagonist, I felt, was getting too much of the action sequences, leaving the female protagonist to do nothing. At first, I decided to give one action sequence that she could logically do instead of the male. Then I realized that one of his means of escaping from a subterranean octopus-like creature was to peel off his shirt, on which the suction cups of the monster had fixed. What should I do? I finally decided to play the scene exactly as it had been with the male lead, and let the other characters deal with it. It gave me a chance to make the other characters rise to the occasion and treat her with dignity, and the same admiration for getting out of the situation, that I gave the male protagonist. I felt that in times of duress, such things wouldn’t matter. My editor at HarperCollins in England suspected that I had added it for prurient reasons even though it wasn’t handled in a prurient way at all. She insisted that it go. I thought she was wrong on many levels, including the one that prompted her negative reaction. So I kept it. And it actually elevates the reader’s opinion of all the characters involved more than it would have with the male character in the scene.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
Hmm. I guess, when it’s printed and you can’t do anything more to it!

Revision Week: Joni Rodgers

Dear Readers…

Day 3 of Revision Week brings us memoirs and ghostwriting with Joni Rodgers, who is known for her beautifully crafted, impeccably researched memoirs. Joni is also a bestselling, critically-praised novelist in her own right.

Please join Joni and The Editor for Day 3 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Joni Rodgers croppedJoni Rodgers is the bestselling author of the memoir Bald in the Land of Big Hair, and five novels, including Crazy for Trying and Sugar Land. She has also ghostwritten, collaborated on, and doctored multiple New York Times bestsellers (nonfiction, novels, and memoirs) and numerous op eds, magazine articles, book proposals, speeches, and screenplays. She has collaborated with notable figures in entertainment, politics, and sports and with ordinary people living extraordinary lives, including actresses Swoosie Kurtz, Kristin Chenowith, and Rue McClanahan, and U.S. Ambassador to Hungary and Susan G. Komen founder/CEO Nancy Brinker.

*Joni’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form for today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

Part Swan Part GooseHow many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the voice and story choices you’ve made?
I’m not sure there is such a thing as “typical”; every book has its own journey, and it takes as many drafts as it takes to get it right. In any worthwhile archeological dig, you’re going to shovel through a lot of sand. As a ghostwriter, my job is easier when I have a client like Swoosie Kurtz [whose memoir comes out in April]. She’s extremely smart, naturally funny, and very hands-on throughout the process. She has a strong point of view and unique voice, and throughout the interview process, she was forthcoming and full of great ideas. The story choices were mostly hers, but they really resonated for me, and I ran with them. Her generosity with her time during the first eight or ten weeks made a dramatic difference in the amount of revision needed later on because I was able to sit with her and learn her voice—and the voice of her 98-year-old mom, Margo, who speaks with a beautifully poetic sort of dementia. The resulting book, Part Swan, Part Goose, is the most extraordinary artistic collaboration I’ve ever been part of. I’m thrilled to see it getting critical accolades.

How does revision work in ghostwriting? How do you strike a balance between your judgment as a writer and the preferences of the person you’re writing for?
It depends on the client. I adjust the process to be what they need: a co-pilot, a chauffeur, or something in between. If something I write doesn’t sit well with my client, then it’s not right. I might explain why I made a certain choice when I was writing, but I never ask them to go against their gut, even when it means scrapping a piece of writing I’m proud of. It’s the ultimate test of “Seek first to understand, then to be understood.” I listen, ask questions, and revamp until we find what feels right.

049b3c_69573add3b6b4310aa73f4398130ef23.jpg_srz_p_198_300_75_22_0.50_1.20_0Were there different challenges in writing your own story for your memoir Bald in the Land of Big Hair, as opposed to crafting someone else’s memoirs as a ghostwriter?
Oh, of course! Writing a memoir can be (and should be, at its best) a deeply emotional journey. Many of my clients tell me it’s like therapy. Every ghostwriter has his or her own unique skillset, and part of mine is that I have experienced that emotional journey and learned firsthand how much work it is and also how healing and liberating it can be. The end goal is always a great book, but I also have the hippie mama goal that I want the writing of the book to be a soul-feeding experience for my client.

049b3c_b89a0dd95a21026387663da9aa44d29e.jpg_srz_p_199_299_75_22_0.50_1.20_0Do you use critique partners for either your novels or your ghostwriting projects?
Absolutely. For the past eight years or so, I’ve been richly blessed to be part of an amazing critique group called the Midwives—all well-published professional authors, women of a certain age, voracious readers, and jolly good pals. One of our founding members, Colleen Thompson, is a bestselling RITA-nominated romantic suspense author who’s blogged and given workshops on the dynamics of a great critique group. Anyone who has a chance to take an online class from her should jump on it. Finding the Midwives was one the greatest gifts in my life, personally and professionally.

049b3c_22baab97827382903081dba505b9a5d8.jpg_srz_p_198_306_75_22_0.50_1.20_0Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
It varies, but in general, I try to minimize the revisions by doing three things during the writing process: First, as early as possible, I get the editor’s feedback on the chapter outline and opening chapters so we’re all in agreement about the structure, content and voice of the book. Second, I’ve learned from experience to anticipate issues that raise red flags in the legal review, and I try to bulletproof the manuscript in advance. Third, I run the finished draft past a consulting editor or critique partner before I hand off to the publisher. No matter how good you are, there’s a point where you can’t see it anymore. I’m not completely joking when I say, “Good freelance editors are so hard to find, I had to grow one of my own.” I’m so lucky to have my daughter, Jerusha Rodgers (Rabid Badger Editing), on my speed dial. It’s worth the money, because it saves a lot of time and makes me look good in front of people I hope to work with again. Clients, agents, and editors are consistently wowed. Her eagle eye has also been incredibly valuable to me in the fiction arena since I decided to go indie with my own books.

Can you share an experience of having a writing problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?
Writing presents challenges; publishing presents problems. It feels like an important distinction to me, because challenges make work a joy, while problems are just a (hopefully educational) pain in the ass. I wrote a novel about seven years ago, and because the publisher of my previous novel had an option on it, I was persuaded to make some pretty big changes—including changing a main character from a lesbian to a man. But the story never felt right to me, even after several drafts with extensive input from my editor and agent. Even though the plot remained the pretty much the same, the nuances and thematic payoff just didn’t ring true to my intention in telling the story. So I set the book aside, thinking it was dead. As years went by, however, my confidence grew, and I knew I had to trust my gut. I went back for another extensive rewrite, restoring my original character, who totally deserves to be in the driver’s seat of her story and definitely grew with the benefit of seven additional years of craft skill. I’ll be releasing the novel as an indie later this year, and if it goes down in flames, so be it. I’m willing to go down in flames for something I believe in. What I’m no longer willing to do is compromise on creative control of my fiction, so the indie publishing revolution has been great for me. I’m able to remain a player in the corporate publishing world as a ghostwriter while spreading my artistic wings as an indie novelist.

049b3c_78c1c6dbbf90fa29deb6f98a0652164d.jpg_srz_p_202_307_75_22_0.50_1.20_0How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
If I ever feel I’ve gotten there, I’ll let you know!

Thank so much, Joni, for sharing insights that extend beyond fiction-writing. Collaborations present unique challenges, and it’s fascinating to get a peek at how you wend your way through them to a successful final book.

Revision Week: Jean Ferris

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues with Jean Ferris, author of more than ninetineen award-winning novels for young readers—some quirky fun, others intensely serious, all packed with thoughts well worth mulling.

Please join Jean and The Editor for Day 2 of Revision Week, and enter to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Jean FerrisJean Ferris has garnered awards and fans with her nineteen novels for young readers, including the beloved off-beat fairy-tale adventure trilogy beginning with Once Upon a Marigoldthe delightfully quirky Love Among the Walnuts and Much Ado About Grubstake, and the riveting Eight Seconds and Bad. Flip to the back covers of Jean’s books and you’ll find lists of awards, like ALA Best Book for Young Adults, Junior Library Guild Selection, New York Public Library Book for the Teen Age, ALA Notable Children’s Book, New York Public Library 100 Titles for Reading and Sharing, and a Smithsonian Magazine Notable Book for Children. I had the pleasure of working with Jean during my time with Harcourt Children’s Books and was privileged to witness this master storyteller’s process first-hand. I’m happy to share a glimpse with you today.

*Jean’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form for today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
I know John Steinbeck supposedly wrote only one draft…because he had written the story over and over in his mind before he put anything on paper. And I have heard about stories writing themselves. Unfortunately, neither of these things has happened to me. Different books need different numbers of drafts, and there are parts of each book that need more drafts than others, so it’s hard to nail down a typical number of drafts…but always at least five. I tend to write what amounts to an expanded outline for the first draft, and each draft gets longer as I understand more and more what the book and its characters are about.

Once Upon a MarigoldYou write your initial drafts longhand, then type them into a computer. Does putting your story through two different media impact your creative process?
I know it is very antiquated…I might as well be writing with a quill pen…but every book begins as a hand-written draft on yellow legal pads. I believe it has been proven by neurologists that a different section of the brain lights up when writing by hand than when typing on the computer. And if it hasn’t been proven yet, I think it will be! All I know is, I feel that I have a different kind of access to my imagination when I am writing by hand than when I’m at the computer…a more thorough, deeper access. Also, I like to see the mess…the strike-outs, the rewrites on top of old work. It makes it seem more like mine alone. When I see a typed draft, it looks as if it could have been done by anybody. Hand-writing just seems more personal and gets me started in an easier way. But I do put the first, hand-written draft into the computer and revise from that.

BadDo you use critique partners or advance readers?
I never use advance readers or critique groups. Not anymore, that is. I have belonged to several such groups and, while I enjoyed the other members of the group, I got too confused by the critiques…which were seldom in agreement. And I discovered that, as I learned the preferences of the group members, I began trying to write things that I knew would please them, whether or not it was something congruent with what I’d originally had in mind. I also learned that, in critiquing the work of others, I would start adapting their ideas to how I would write it…until it became my work and not theirs. Apparently I’m not a good collaborator, so I sit and stew over my work by myself. I do, however, welcome title suggestions. I am terrible at titles. [Editor’s Note: Ah, but brainstorming titles with Jean is super fun. I think the results of our COLLABORATIVE efforts with titles speak for themselves, Jean!]

Grubstake 2Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
I would say the fourth or fifth draft gets shown to an editor. And I always know that there will be more revising ahead, though I always hope there won’t be! I usually think I’m pretty well finished by the time I show the work to an editor but there is usually a lot more to be done. I have taken out or added characters, added or subtracted subplots, scenes, whole chapters…and these revisions have always improved something I thought was just fine the way it was. Editing and writing are completely different skills. Some people are lucky enough to be good at both, but I need a good editor who isn’t me.

Eight Seconds2Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?
I can’t think of a particular incident but, while I know I often have trouble with transitions and with the reactions of characters to incidents, I still keep making the same mistakes. Almost every editor I’ve had has pointed this out to me, but I still need it pointed with each new project. Slow learner, I guess.

Love Among the WalnutsHow do you know you’ve got the final draft?
I think I’ve got the final draft when I’m just sick of the story, and any changes I’m making to it seem to be making it different without making it better. I let it sit for a while and look at it again, and if I can then see ways to make it different AND better, I do that. If I can’t, I (mistakenly) think I’m finished.

Thank you so much, Jean. Talking to you about writing led me to talking about your stories with my nine-year-old sons. They’ve all enjoyed the Marigold books, and one now has Much Ado About Grubstake in his backpack to start at school tomorrow. There’s a dog on the cover, of course, and what little boy can resist that? I know he’ll love the story as much as I do.

Revision Week: Marla Frazee

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week kicks off with Marla Frazee, bestselling author and illustrator of more than nineteen picture books as well as the winner of numerous awards, including two Caldecott Honors. Marla wields both words and pictures, and her insights into the revision process are a wonderful way to start the week.

Please join Marla and The Editor for Day 1 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

MarlaFrazee-225x300Marla Frazee was awarded a Caldecott Honor for All the World and A Couple of Boys Have the Best Week Ever. She is the author-illustrator of Roller Coaster, Walk On!, The Boss Baby, Boot & Shoe, and the upcoming The Farmer and the Clown, as well as the illustrator of many other books including The Seven Silly Eaters, Stars, and the NYT bestselling Clementine series. She most recently illustrated God Got a Dog by Cynthia Rylant. For 20 years, Marla has “paid it forward” by teaching children’s book illustration at Art Center College of Design in Pasadena, CA. I’m a huge Marla fan. In fact, Christmas isn’t Christmas for my family without multiple readings of her Santa Claus the World’s Number One Toy Expert.

*Marla’s interview follows the Rafflecopter form for today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway. Scroll down for her full interview.

a Rafflecopter giveaway

When you are both the author and illustrator for a book, does the story start its development as words or pictures? For me, it usually starts almost by accident with a doodle of a character. Or two. Once a character has my attention, I spin out possible stories and scenarios. For a while, this all plays out in my head –– like a small movie. If I start to get bored with it all, it fades away. But if I remain intrigued, I keep at it. Once I’ve got my teeth in some storyline, I will draw a little and/or write a little until something starts to take root. This can take a few days or weeks or years.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made? Countless. I mean it. I have NO clue. A lot. Over 10? Yes. Over 25? Maybe. Over 50? Sometimes. I don’t ever save them all because I get a lot of satisfaction out of trashing things.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft? god-got-a-dog-coverAt this point I’ve written and illustrated seven picture books, and they’ve all been edited by Allyn Johnston, who for the past five years has been the VP/Publisher of Beach Lane Books [an imprint of Simon & Schuster]. Allyn and I work very closely together at every stage of the book’s development. I don’t think of revising as revising. It’s more a question of, “Are we getting somewhere?” If we aren’t, I may decide to hibernate with the project for a while until I know where I’m trying to go. I can’t expect Allyn or anyone else to help me get where I’m going if I don’t even know where I want to go. Once that becomes clearer, then it is very helpful to collaborate. Are we getting there? Are we heading some other direction? Do we need to turn around and try again? [Editor’s note: Readers, click over to Marla’s web page for God Got a Dog for the background on that project, which gives fascinating insight into Allyn and Marla’s working relationship.]

Do you use critique partners? I am the flake member of an awesome critique group. We’ve been meeting once a month for over 20 years. Or they have. I love the friendship, the camaraderie, and the trust that has developed between us. I mean, they tolerate my inability to be a consistent attendee and never, ever make me feel bad about it. Sometimes, when I go, I go to talk about work.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did? boot-and-shoe-coverWhen I was working on the initial thumbnails and sketch dummies for Boot & Shoe, I felt the story could’ve been more easily told as an animated cartoon. There were two almost identical dogs who hung out on different sides of a house, chased a squirrel around the house, got confused and turned around, and then couldn’t figure out where the other dog was. It was a story that required a lot of action in the pictures and needed a lot of directional clarification, but I was trying to tell it in a form where pictures are still and the action moves primarily from left to right. I puzzled it out for many weeks. I almost gave up a number of times.

boss-baby-coverI’m so glad for that insight into Boot & Shoe, one of my favorite picture books. What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising? The most drastic thing? I got the idea for The Boss Baby and it seemed really workable. I thought it was going to write and illustrate itself, honestly. It felt as if the idea arrived fully formed. But the more I worked on it, the less excited Allyn was about it. I couldn’t figure it out. It seemed as if the project was going to die a slow, anguished death. But the character still kept cracking me up, so I knew there was something there. I renamed the character and book “The Little F***er” and started over again. I worked on a tiny sketch dummy in the corner of a local coffee house, hoping that no one would ask to see what I was doing. Recasting it helped give the project the edge it needed, ultimately. I still have “The Little F***er” artifact, in case anyone would like to check it out.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft? It isn’t ever completely final. Eventually we run out of time. The trick is to allow enough time in the schedule so that we can catch as much as possible before we’ve got to wrap.

Thank you so much, Marla, for sharing your revision process!

Welcome to DearEditor.com’s 2014 Revision Week!

Dear Readers…

It’s here: DearEditor.com’s third annual Revision Week! Five days, five best-selling and award-winning authors with 80 books among them sharing revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Stop by each day for a new author interview and to enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand finale Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

Read the rest of today’s post to learn about the authors participating…

Welcome to five days of free edit giveaways and revision advice and insights like these…

MarlaFrazee-225x300 croppedMarla Frazee, two-time Caldecott Honor-winning picture book author/illustrator: “I don’t think of revising as revising. It’s more a question of, Are we getting somewhere?”

 

Jean FerrisJean Ferris, award-winning author of nineteen young adult novels: I tend to write what amounts to an expanded outline for the first draft, and each draft gets longer as I understand more and more what the book and its characters are about.” 

Joni Rodgers croppedJoni Rodgers, best-selling novelist and ghostwriter: “[Ghostwriting] is the ultimate test of ‘Seek first to understand, then to be understood.’ I listen, ask questions, and revamp until we find what feels right.” 

Warren_FahyxWarren Fahy, best-selling author of science-based thrillers: Wherever [my advance readers] stop reading a manuscript, I fix it so that nobody wants to stop there again. I pay attention to what they don’t say as much as to what they do say.”

Denise Grover SwankDenise Grover Swank, best-selling author of YA, NA, and novels for adults. “It’s not unusual for me to write a first draft and then cut one-third to half the book out and start over again.”

Guest Editor Vonna Carter re: Choosing Online Writing Courses

//

Dear Editor…

I’ve been following you for the past few years. I fell off the wagon with my children’s writing and am thinking an online class might get me running again. Can you suggest a good class with regular assignments and instructor feedback. Doesn’t matter where the class is located since I’m thinking in terms of online.

Thanks very much,
Cheryl

Vonna CarterVonna Carter—Middle Grade writer and Keeper-of-the-Lists—rounds up info on editors, art directors and agents attending conferences, retreats and workshops, plus online classes and where to get that elusive MFA in writing for young readers.

Dear Cheryl…

This is a question many people are asking. We are fortunate these days to have abundant options for online classes and workshops, but they are not one-size-fits-all. I maintain a list of them on my website at Online Workshops. Before signing up for a course, analyze your criteria for the class. Here are some points to consider:

Level: Are you new to writing for children? Have you completed manuscripts but need help revising? Are you an experienced writer looking for a master class?

Budget: Are you looking to spend $300 or $3000?

Time: Do you want a two-hour workshop, a four- or six-week course, or an ongoing class? How much time can you spend on homework assignments?

Genre and Age Group: Do you write picture books? MG? Romantic YA? Adult thrillers?

Topic: Do you need an in-depth course on voice, plot, pacing or other focus area?

Interaction: Do you enjoy engaging with other students or do you prefer working alone?

Format: Are you open to video conferencing? Are you comfortable posting on forums or engaging in conference calls? Do you prefer one-on-one emails with your instructor?

References: An important consideration is the class’s reputation. Some wonderful teachers use their websites or newsletters to shine a spotlight on their former students who are now published authors, but not all classes make it this easy to see references. Can you contact writers who have taken this course?

Taking an online class can be a great experience. I hope this checklist helps you find classes that are best for you.

-Vonna Carter

Newsflash: Giveaway Winner!

Dear Readers…

I’m pleased to announce the winner of last week’s giveaway—a free full manuscript edit—celebrating the completion of my final draft of Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction: Irene Latham, with her middle grade contemporary survival fiction.

Congratulations to Irene, and happy writing to all!

The Editor

Thank you all for helping this writer celebrate my milestone. Please return tomorrow for a new question-and-answer with a Guest Editor, and do plan on entering the daily giveaways during DearEditor.com’s annual Revision Week at the end of April. In meantime, some words that may help you think about your story’s opening a little differently, from one of my favorite editors, Arthur Levine of Arthur A. Levine Books:

“I think of first pages as a first date. We’re at the stage of a relationship when it’s all promise. Establish a spark for the beginning, and a trust. The foundation for a good relationship.”

ALERT: Free FULL MANUSCRIPT Edit Giveaway!

Dear Readers…

The Editor believes the path to publication should be as full of celebration as it is of hard work. Therefore, to celebrate finishing the final draft of her new craft book, Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction, the Editor is giving away a FREE EDIT of a full fiction manuscript. Entry deadline: March 22, 2014. Read on for rules….

 

Rules for the giveaway of the FREE edit of the your full fiction manuscript:

  1. Your manuscript must be FICTION of ANY GENRE for ANY AGE GROUP, including picture books.
  2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE and no longer than 80,000 words. (Do not submit any ms pages unless notified by the Editor that you have won the giveaway.)
  3. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.
  4. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, March 22, 2014, PST
  5. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 24, 2014, on DearEditor.com and on the DearEditor.com Facebook and Google+ pages, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” tab on this blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Manuscript Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript, YOUR FULL NAME, and the genre/category (i.e., “fantasy/YA”). DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact tab, send an email entry directly to the-editor@deareditor.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” tab on DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title, genre/category, and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week Archive

Every spring, DearEditor.com hosts prolific authors for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. You can read those interviews here, learning from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day. Next spring, join DearEditor.com for Revision Week to read the new crop of interviews and enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

This year’s Revision Week may be over, but you can still read all the insightful interviews! Below is an alphabetical list of every interview ever featured during a DearEditor.com Revision Week, with an excerpt from each interview. Just click on a name to see the full Q&A!

Nathan Bransford, top publishing blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books: “I was a very hands-on agent. I always thought it was important to make sure the manuscript was as good as possible before going out to editors.”

Rachel Caine, New York Times, USA Today, and internationally bestselling author of more than 30 novels and series: “With a book due every three months, I don’t have a lot of luxury to rework things—they need to be close to the target (very close!) on the first draft.There’s never a final draft for me, only the one you have to turn in because you’re out of time.”

Mark A. Clements, award-winning horror/suspense author, screenwriter, writing teacher, and ghostwriter: “I never share even slightly rough material and I don’t seek out advice on how to ‘fix’ something. I don’t believe in writing by committee.”

Larry Dane Brimner, award-winning author of 150 books for readers of all ages. “The number of drafts it takes to get any manuscript ‘right’ is directly related to the amount of time I’ve spent thinking about a project before I stand in front of my computer station to compose.”

Chanel Cleeton, writes contemporary romances, women’s fiction, and thriller: “At an absolute minimum, I go through four drafts before I send a book to my editor.”

Susan Stevens Crummel, award-winning author and co-author of nearly 20 picture books. “We feel that this is what makes our collaboration successful–it’s an organic process where the story and art evolve together, meshing to create a more cohesive product.”

Peter Economy, bestselling author and ghostwriter of more than 6o books. “It is extremely important that I capture my client’s voice and that he or she is comfortable with the style and happy with the book that results. If I haven’t accomplished that, then I have failed.”

Warren Fahy, best-selling author of science-based thrillers: “Wherever [my advance readers] stop reading a manuscript, I fix it so that nobody wants to stop there again. I pay attention to what they don’t say as much as to what they do say.”

Jean Ferris, award-winning author of nineteen young adult novels: “I tend to write what amounts to an expanded outline for the first draft, and each draft gets longer as I understand more and more what the book and its characters are about.”

Marie Force, New York Times bestselling author of over 50 contemporary romances and series: “The last thing I do is read the manuscript on my Kindle, the way a reader would.”  

Marla Frazee, two-time Caldecott Honor-winning and best-selling picture book author/illustrator: “I don’t think of revising as revising. It’s more a question of, Are we getting somewhere?”

Laura Griffin, New York Times bestselling romance writer, with 11 acclaimed novels. “I always try to remember that no matter how compelling a plot is, the reader is really in it for the characters. So I try to make sure I focus plenty of attention on character arc so that the story will have an emotional punch.”

Denise Grover Swank, best-selling author of YA, NA, and novels for adults. “It’s not unusual for me to write a first draft and then cut one-third to half the book out and start over again.”

Bruce Hale, award-winning author/illustrator of nearly 30 books for kids. “When I can’t find anything else to tinker with, and I have that general feeling that if I mess with it much more, the entire souffle will collapse in a soggy heap — that’s when I know it’s the final draft.”

Matthew J. Kirby, award-winning author of five novels for young adults, including an installment in the bestselling Infinity Ring series. “My confidence in how the characters and scenes are working doesn’t seem tied in anyway to the number of times I’ve revised them, but to my general awareness of the story as a whole.”

Kathleen Krull, award-winning author of more than 100 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers: “When I get to the point of taking out commas and putting them back in again, I feel ready to send it off.”

R.L. LaFevers, award-winning author of the 13 novels and series for young people: “There is a point where you aren’t necessarily making it better—just making it different. Or so I try to tell myself.”

Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger: “Back when every novel I wrote was wholly new, I used to write a “discovery draft” wherein, after some prewriting, I plunged in and wrote a full story (with a beginning, middle, and end—say, 35,000 to 60,000 words) to get to know my protagonists, their goals and their world. When I was done, I would print it. Read it. Toss it. And delete the file.”

Joni Rodgers, best-selling novelist and ghostwriter: “[Ghostwriting] is the ultimate test of ‘Seek first to understand, then to be understood.’ I listen, ask questions, and revamp until we find what feels right.” 

Pam Munoz Ryan, author of more than 30 books for young readers, Newbery Honor Book winner: “Book manuscripts always want more. Putting them to bed is like putting a toddler to bed. You tuck them in and think that’s it, yet they want one more kiss, a drink of water, a song, the blanket fluffed, a night light….”

Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, bestselling chapter book collaborators: “[With collaborations] you have to be very flexible in your negotiations so both parties come away feeling ownership of the final draft, and also very sensitive not to make it a critique of your partner’s talents but a decision of what works best at any given moment in the manuscript.”

Jane Yolen has written over 300 books, mostly for young readers; won numerous awards; and been given six honorary doctorates in literature: “I am not a planner and plotter, so my novels come together in the latter stages of revisions. But they feel fresher to me for that.”

Salina Yoon, award-winning and bestselling author/illustrator of over 160 books for children: “Usually, it’s around the third draft of storyboarding (sketches and text) where I feel like it’s either there or it isn’t.”

NaNoWriMo a No-No?

/

Dear Editor…

I am doing NaNoWriMo and am doing surprisingly well! I was looking up NaNo fun (proscrastinating) when I stumbled upon something from another editor saying that they won’t publish anything from NaNoWriMo. They called it stupid and useless! Is this true? I understand not publishing something on December 1st, but can a novel from NaNo still be good if edited properly?

Sincerely,
Still Just a Teen

Dear Still Just a Teen . . .

Publication can be the eventual result of NaNoWriMo. I know a novelist whose debut started there. “Started” being the key word. It’s not reasonable to think you can submit what you draft during this intense month without substantial revision. Likely many drafts. First drafts are about discovery and allowing a big ol’ embarrassing pile o’ Ugly to land on the page. NaNoWriMo helps you turn off your inner editor and vomit all that ugly out. Then the digging for Beautiful begins. Veteran novelists will tell you they spend more time revising than writing Draft One. For inspiration, read my Revision Week interviews with lauded writers here. NaNoWriMo gets you over the Draft One hump, and that’s not “useless.” I’m following prolific YA/NA author Jennifer L. Armentrout on Facebook right now as she posts about touring a bestseller while NaNoWriMo’ing her next book. So erase “stupid” and “useless” from your mind and regain that productive mindset that had you cranking out your personal pile o’ Ugly. Beautiful awaits.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Newsflash: Another Free Critique Giveaway Winner!

Dear Readers…

I’m pleased to announce the winner of the FREE CRITIQUE Giveaway celebrating Steven M. Booth’s debut YA fantasy DARK TALISMAN: Mara Bushansky, with her YA novel. I’ll be sending you an email, Mara.

Happy writing to all!
The Editor

Thank you all for helping me celebrate Steven M. Booth’s debut novel. It’s a great book and I’m proud to have been a part of his blog tour—and super pleased to have been able to offer you all not only a free critique opportunity but also a shot at the Kindle Fire HD Steve gave away.

I’ll see you on Monday with a new question-and-answer post about NaNoWriMo. In meantime, some words for mulling from one of my favorite writers of all time, Karen Cushman, who turned me into a word-fumbling, grateful wreck of a fan when she agreed to share tips about creating characters in my book Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies:

“Be curious. Be aware. Be open.”

Newsflash: FREE CRITIQUE Giveaway Winner!

Dear Readers…

I’m pleased to announce the winner of the FREE CRITIQUE Giveaway: Deb DiTomaso, with her historical/paranormal YA “Shoddy Girl”. I’ll be sending you an email, Deb.

Happy writing to all!
The Editor

Thank you all for helping me celebrate the midpoint deadline milestone for my upcoming craft book Writing the ‘New Adult’ Novel. Keep an eye on DearEditor.com in the next couple of weeks, because I’ve got ANOTHER GIVEAWAY planned for a blog tour stop by Steven M. Booth, author of the fantastic debut YA fantasy Dark Talisman. I love Steven’s book and couldn’t resist making a party out of its release.

I’ll see you on Monday with a new question-and-answer post. In meantime, some advice for mulling from editor Arthur A. Levine, VP & Publisher of Scholastic’s Arthur A. Levine Books:

“Great writers use anticipation more often than surprise.”

 

Newsflash: FREE CRITIQUE giveaway!

Dear Readers…

Anyone who’s followed DearEditor.com for long knows that the Editor believes the path to final manuscript should be as full of celebration as it is of hard work. Therefore, to celebrate meeting her deadline for the first half of her new craft book, Writing the ‘New Adult’ Novel, the Editor is giving away a FREE CRITIQUE OF THE FIRST 10 PAGES OF YOUR FICTION MANUSCRIPT. Entry deadline: November 7, 2013. Read on for rules….

Use the blue scroll bar on the right to scroll down for complete rules and entry instructions for the giveaway of the FREE CRITIQUE* of the first 10 pages of your fiction manuscript. NOTE: DO NOT SUBMIT ANY MS PAGES. Please only submit the info specified below in the body of your entry:

  1. Your manuscript must be FICTION of ANY GENRE for ANY AGE GROUP (general, sci fi, romance, steam punk . . . you get the idea; no non-fiction like how-to’s or memoirs—as fictional as those may seem; and sorry, no children’s picture books this time). Your manuscript can be for adults, new adults, or young readers (YA or MG).
  2. The FIRST 10 PAGES of your manuscript must be COMPLETE. No word count limit for those pages, but they do have to be 12-pt font, double-spaced, per industry standard. (Do not submit those pages unless notified by the Editor that you have won the giveaway.)
  3. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.
  4. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, November 7, 2013, PST.
  5. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on November 8, 2013, on DearEditor.com and on the DearEditor.com Facebook and Google+ pages, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Critique Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript, YOUR FULL NAME, and the genre/category (i.e., “fantasy/YA”). DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to the-editor@deareditor.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title, genre/category, and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

*In a “critique,” the author receives general feedback about the manuscript sample’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), concept, and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.”

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Is Teen Too Young to Publish?

/

 

Dear Editor…

I’m a teen and my dream is to be an author. But in the past year it has started to become more of a reality. I have written a rough draft of a novel and have begun revising. But I don’t know whether I should go on. Is it too risky being a teen in this market? Should I wait for my dream when I’m older? Thank you so much! Bye.

Just A Teen

Dear Just A Teen…

Christopher Paolini and Abigail Gibbs prove age is no reason to hit Pause. But you’re wise beyond your years to ponder the path ahead. Be of two minds: 1) Book: Craft, not age, matters. Hire a pro freelance editor to evaluate your ms for craft and market potential and guide you in honing your skills to compete with veteran writers. Or try a local college ‘extension’ class for writing. Get feedback from writing experts. 2) Business: Pubbing a book is the same as opening a business whether you self-pub or sign with a publisher. With your parents’ help, get an agent to protect your rights, manage the money, and devise safe ways to put you and your books ‘out there.’ The Literary Market Place has an agent directory, as do writers’ groups like SCBWI or SFWA. Look into your writing category’s group, read my post Too Young to Be Taken Seriously?, and KEEP WRITING! This may not become your debut novel, but you’ll be a better writer for it.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Guest Editor Robin Cruise: “onto” versus “on to”

Dear Editor…

Which is right?

1) Jane stepped onto the patio.
2) Jane stepped on to the patio.

My net surfing tells me #1 is right, that if a person or thing is “upon” a concrete object, you can use “onto” and reserve “on to” for things non-concrete or metaphorical, like “Please move on to the next topic.” Is there a net site I could use as a reference?

Thanks so much,
All Mixed Up

Robin CruiseRobin Cruise has worked in various capacities in trade publishing for more than twenty years. Since launching Red Pencil Consulting in November 2011, she has collaborated directly with authors, illustrators, agents, editors, content developers, publishers, and other individuals/entrepreneurs/businesses. She is a skilled researcher, writer, editor, and project manager who helps create, shape, and deliver high-quality content for readers of all ages, both fiction and nonfiction for adults as well as children. Robin may be contacted directly at rcruise1@gmail.com.

Dear All Mixed Up…

I know and feel your pain! On, onto—such eensie words and yet sometimes such GINORMOUS pains in the heinie, right? Well, let’s just keep the way to go simple: With no hesitation whatsoever, I would advise Jane to step boldly onto the patio—and to hang on to her bonnet when she does so! In a nutshell, onto signals movement—and even though it’s a preposition, onto sort of feels/functions like an adverb. Meanwhile, on doesn’t signal motion but is often an adverb that’s part of the verbal phrase, as with hold on to or hang on to. And that’s precisely why Jane should hang on to her bonnet! And while I’m at it, I’d also advise Jane to avoid stepping in the muck—and to forget what’s-his-name if she’s just not that into him! ;>0

Because we’re in the Land of On . . . Keep in mind that it generally makes sense to use on rather than the stuffier upon unless there’s some condition afoot that warrants the latter, for example: The brilliant writer will be paid handsomely upon delivery of the final revised manuscript.

Robin Cruise
Red Pencil Consulting

Are Series Giving Way to Stand-Alones in MG Fiction?

Dear Editor…

I am wondering: Have series fallen into disfavor? Is it currently better to write a stand-alone book when writing middle grade fiction? From your recent post and your state of the market keynote at the SCBWI Summer Conference last month, I would guess that our current tight market, although showing signs of improvement, would favor stand-alone books. Is this correct? I would love to have your opinion on this.

Thanks!
Pauline

Dear Pauline…

It’s more accurate to say that the current middle grade fiction market is more open to stand-alone books than it’s been in recent years. I interviewed seventeen industry insiders to create that market keynote you’re referring to, including agents, editors, sales and marketing managers in both the trade and the school & library markets, independent marketing experts, and experts in digital books. I asked every one of them about the state of series in each of the various children’s book categories. I came away from those interviews understanding that the inclination toward trilogies and series in MG and YA fiction in recent years seems to be shifting a bit, with agents and editors more actively seeking stand-alone books that can stand out thanks to distinct, marketable concepts and that can hold up thanks to strong craft.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Guest Editor Eddie Gamarra re: Agents for Your Script or Book-to-Film Rights

/

Dear Editor…

I was talking to my screenwriting professor about getting an agent.  He informed me that writer-directors do not get talent agents, but have to get literary agents. I have a producer already interested in my work, so I thought it might be safe if I sought representation. Is this true? How do I go about that?

Sincerely,
J.

ed_bw_headshot-1Eddie Gamarra is a literary manager/producer at The Gotham Group. He represents screenwriters, directors, animators, authors, illustrators, publishers, and animation studios around the world that specialize in children and family entertainment. His main focus is in animation and literature ranging from picture books, novels, anthologies, and graphic novels. His clients include numerous New York Times best-selling authors and illustrators, as well as Oscar, Emmy, Caldecott, Newberry, and Geisel award winners. Eddie is Executive Producer of James Dashner’s upcoming The Maze Runner film. The Gotham Group has a producing component and reps over 300 writers, authors, and publishing company clients.

Dear J….

From the Hollywood perspective, your professor is correct. Actors have “talent” agents; screenwriters and directors have “literary” agents and /or managers; and authors/illustrators have “book” agents. All reps should be working to insure the best opportunities for their clients in their specific fields of expertise and often partner with other reps (“co-reps”/ “co-agents”) when they need expert advice outside their field. If you are an author/illustrator trying to have your book optioned as a movie or TV show (TV movie, web series, etc.), OR if you are an author adapting your own work as a script, then your book agent typically partners with a “book-to-film” agent who can help you and your book agent navigate the dark forest of Hollywood. If you are strictly a screenwriter, then you can have a lit agent or manager help you sell your script.

Many book agents work with book-to-film co-reps and so you can have your book agent help you add that new member to your team. If you do not have a book agent or if your book agent does not have any relationships with co-reps, then you will have to research the best “book-to-film” rep just as you would research a book agent.  Hollywood is less transparent than publishing so the best ways to begin that search are to research Publishers Marketplace, look up reps who have spoken at SCBWI events, and also look at the websites’ of the authors/illustrators’ whose work most closely resembles yours and see if they have any reps listed on their own websites.  Ask your friends who have been through the optioning process to see who they used and liked.

In your case it is also very important to get some inside information about the producer interested in your project. While anyone can use resources like IMDb or Box Office Mojo to research a producer, it is essential to have up-to-date insider information about that producer. Their credits may be amazing, but there are any number of reasons why they may not be the right match for you or your book.

Keep in mind, if one person sees potential in your project, others might too. There may be better collaborations to be made. Your reps will help you figure it all out.

Eddie Gamarra
The Gotham Group

Newsflash: FREE EDIT Giveaway Winner!

Dear Readers…

I’m pleased to announce the winner of the FREE EDIT Giveaway celebrating Annemarie O’Brien‘s debut novel, Lara’s Gift: Ann Jacobus Kordahl, with her YA Romancing the Dark in the City of Light. I’ll be sending you an email, Ann.

Happy writing to all!
The Editor

Thank you all for helping me celebrate Annemarie’s debut. Lara’s Gift really is a great story, so do check it out.

And keep coming back to DearEditor.com. Regular question-and-answer posts will resume tomorrow, and more Free Edit Giveaways are already planned.

Now for some words from Philip Pullman to ease you into your next writing session:

“After nourishment, shelter and companionship, stories are the thing we need most in the world.”

FREE EDIT Giveaway to Celebrate Annemarie O’Brien’s Debut, Lara’s Gift

/

Dear Readers…

I’m thrilled today to host Annemarie O’Brien, DearEditor.com’s first Free Edit giveaway winner ever, whose debut MG novel LARA’S GIFT pubs this week. As far as I’m concerned, there’s only one way to celebrate that: with another FREE EDIT giveaway! Read my interview with Annemarie about her journey from idea to publication, then enter the giveaway for a free substantive edit of your fiction manuscript (novels up to 80,000 words; picture book mss ok). Good luck!

The Editor

Annemarie O’Brien has an MFA in Writing for Children & Young Adults from the Vermont College of Fine Arts. She teaches creative writing courses at UC Berkeley Extension, Stanford Continuing Studies, Pixar, and DreamWorks, as well as edits children’s books for Room to Read which advocates literacy in developing countries. Lara’s Gift is her debut middle grade novel.

LarasGift“Powerful and engrossing!” – Kirkus starred review
In 1914 Russia, Lara is being groomed by her father to be the next kennel steward for the Count’s borzoi dogs unless her mother bears a son. But Lara’s visions, suppressed by her father, suggest she has a special bond with the dogs. [book trailer]

Annemarie, I’m curious about your publication experience as well as the actual writing of Lara’s Gift. How did you connect with your agent?
Author and friend Varian Johnson introduced me to Sarah Davies at the 2009 Los Angeles SCBWI National Conference. He thought she would be a good fit for me and my manuscript, LARA’S GIFT. Sarah and I chatted and it didn’t take long before I was charmed by her lovely British accent. More importantly, I felt in my gut that Sarah was the right agent for me. What I like best about Sarah is that she’s a great communicator and responds to my emails and questions almost immediately! She is equally as strong and comfortable on the editorial side of publishing as she is on the business end. She is consummate professional and cares about all of her writers.

What was it like to get the offer from your editor?
It was a dream come true!

About ten years before I submitted my manuscript to Knopf editor Erin Clarke, my college roommate, Amy Myer, gave me a tour of Random House and showed me a room filled floor to ceiling with Knopf books. As I drooled over all the titles, I said, “I would love to get published by Knopf.” My friend responded with, “Yeah, you and everybody else!” She meant no harm by these words. She was absolutely right, but it didn’t stop me from dreaming.

Years later when I was preparing my Vermont College of Fine Arts critical thesis on the function of prologues, I was most impressed with the prologue in THE BOOK THIEF by Marcus Zusak and contacted his editor, Erin Clarke, for an interview. She was so helpful and quick to respond to my emails that I had a strong feeling she would be great to work with. So when Pacific Coast Children’s Writers Workshop director Nancy Sondel heard I couldn’t participate in her YA master class workshop, I told her I would come if she brought in Erin Clarke. Well, Nancy delivered and that was how I got the opportunity to have Erin read the opening chapter of LARA’S GIFT. She liked it and invited me to submit the full manuscript. It was painful waiting for a response, but when the good news came I was beyond thrilled!
 
You have two borzoi, and your debut novel is about borzoi. What is it about that breed of dog that connects with you?
Annemarie author photoIt was by accident that I discovered borzoi. When I graduated with an MBA in international business and landed a job in Russia, I decided I would get a true Russian dog. I figured there was no dog more Russian than a borzoi so I set out to find one. It wasn’t as easy as I thought it would be but eventually I was gifted a puppy. Her name was Dasha and she was the most amazing dog. She was not only a great companion, but she opened so many doors for me. It’s because of her that LARA’S GIFT exists. That’s the kind of impression she had on me! One so strong a book came out of it!!

Lara’s Gift is set in Imperial Russia. What was involved in researching that time and place?
I spent about ten years of my life living and working in Russia and its neighboring countries so I have a good deal of knowledge about its history, language, and culture. I also have read numerous books on its history and literature.

One book in particular that helped me better understand life on the country estates in Russia breeding borzoi dogs was OBSERVATIONS ON BORZOI by Joseph B. Thomas about his travels in the early 1900s in search of the perfect borzoi in Russia to bring back to the United States. In his book, a wolf hunt was described.

Smith College Russian Professor Alexander Woronzoff-Dashkoff also inspired the story behind LARA’S GIFT from the questions he couldn’t answer when I learned about his connection to the famous Woronzova kennel. It is his family that started the Woronzova kennel that is cited in OBSERVATIONS ON BORZOI as being one of the top three. The other two were Gatchina, owned by Tsar Nicholas, and Perchino, owned by the Grand Duke Nicolai.

I also had numerous readers—including Russian historians, borzoi historians, and writers—read my story to help me strengthen the writing and the accuracy. One such opportunity was with YOU, Deborah, when you offered a free manuscript critique when you launched your blog, DearEditor.com. That was a terrific experience! (Readers, if you’re a writer and have a manuscript you’re looking to improve, I highly recommend Deborah. She’ll see where your story needs help and articulate a good game plan to get you going. I assign her WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES to my students at UC Berkeley, Stanford, and Pixar.”)

What was it like to revise with an editor post-contract?
My big fear was that I would have to do a major revision of my story. For good or bad, I was relieved when Erin told me that she didn’t think LARA’S GIFT needed any major revisions. We primarily worked on tightening some scenes by cutting and by expanding others to tap into the emotion of the moment. She also had me change the ending a bit to one that is now much stronger than the original one I submitted to her. I have a tendency to want to protect my characters and Erin saw to it that Lara would struggle more.

I agreed with all of her suggestions and feel they made the story stronger. So I’m very grateful to Erin for her keen eye and respectful manner in asking for changes. She also let me keep the original title, DANCE WITH BORZOI, as well as Lara’s original name (Bohdana) up until the very end. It was really quite clever of her to hold off on these requested changes because it didn’t distract me from the real revision work that was needed on the story.

What’s next for you?
I am working on the companion novel to LARA’S GIFT. The working title is FROM RUSSIA WITH DASHA. It is set primarily in the Gorbachev era in both Northampton, Massachusetts, and Moscow, Russia, and told from two points of view.

Enter to win copies of Lara’s Gift and hear more from Annemarie at these stops on her blog tour:
Fido and Friend, Fiction Notes, Kissing the Earth, Quirk and Quill, Simple Saturday, Coffee with a Canine, Dog Reads, World Reads, Children’s Literature Network, Word Spelunking, Random Acts of Reading, The Hiding Spot, Beth Fish Reads

I’m giving away a FREE Substantive Edit* of one fiction manuscript. I can’t get Rafflecopter to work with my site format yet, so for this contest here are the rules and ways to enter:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY FICTION GENRE or FICTION CATEGORY (for adults or children, including picture books).
  2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE.
  3. Your manuscript SHALL NOT EXCEED 80,000 WORDS.
  4. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.
  5. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, August 11, 2013, PST.
  6. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on August 12, 2013, on DearEditor.com and on the DearEditor.com Facebook and Google+ pages, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to the-editor@deareditor.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

*In a “Substantive Edit,” the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience, as the Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.”

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Resources for Richer Characters, Plots, Voice, Dialogue

///

Dear Readers…

Two things floated to the top of the Internet this week that you might find useful for beefing up characters, plot, voice, and dialogue, so The Editor is featuring them today: “Deborah Halverson on Why Perfectly Nice People Make Perfect Bad Guys” and The Editor’s FREE webinar “Four Fixes for a ‘Flat’ Story”. Read on for descriptions and links…

“Deborah Halverson on Why Perfectly Nice People Make Perfect Bad Guys”The Editor’s guest post on the great Cynsations blog, which is featuring and tweeting “best of” guest posts while host Cynthia Leitich Smith is on summer hiatus.  Excerpt: “Some antagonists seem perfectly nice when you first meet them. They can have very obvious moral centers. They might even be friends with the protagonist—or would be, under different circumstances. But in the circumstances you devise to get and keep your story rocking, that character provokes your protagonist, challenges him or throws roadblocks in his path or pushes him into situations of actual physical peril. The antagonist causes wonderful, juicy conflict even if he still seems inherently nice otherwise…. How can you make your antagonist believably sympathetic? Here are five ways…”

“Four Fixes for a ‘Flat’ Story” webinar w/ The Editor & Katie Davis – This 1.5-hr webinar covers four ways to fix your story when an editor tells you, “I couldn’t get into the story…. The story feels flat…. The voice isn’t distinct…. The dialogue doesn’t sound natural.” It was created as the grand finale for The Editor’s Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies Blog Tour but you can still view the full webinar (free) on Youtube.

What If My Agent Doesn’t Live in NYC?

Dear Editor…

In thinking about finding an agent to represent me, should location be a big consideration? Does it matter if an agent does not live in NY where I would like to submit manuscripts?

Thank you!
Lisa

Dear Lisa…

Location, location, location! may be a crucial motto for real estate, but it needs no place in your agent submission strategizing. Most business between agents and editors is conducted via email and phone, so your agent can live outside publishing’s NYC hub. And plenty do. (My agent for children’s books lives in Flagstaff, my agent for adult projects lives in San Diego, and my agent for Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies lives in Sacramento.) Those agents typically make semi-annual trips to the Big Apple, packing each day with editor meetings, and they supplement those trips with meet-ups at big industry events and conferences like Book Expo America or the Annual SCBWI Summer Conference. When you start talking representation with an agent, ask how s/he keeps ongoing relationships with editors fresh and forges new ones. This will give you a feel for the agent’s connections and networking prowess.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Guest Editor Danny Fingeroth re: Submitting Graphic Novels

/

Dear Editor…

My husband has put together a middle grade hybrid graphic novel that I’ve helped him to edit. He’s gotten some positive responses from agents but is always told they don’t think they can place the book. Is there something more challenging about selling this type of novel even though they seem to be very popular right now?

Sincerely,
Heather

Danny FingerothDanny Fingeroth was a longtime writer and editor for Marvel Comics, best known for his work on Spider-Man. He has taught comics and graphic novel writing at NYU, The New School, and The MiMaster Art Institute in Milan. A recognized expert on comics and graphic novels, he has lectured about them at venues including The Smithsonian Institution and The Metropolitan Museum. Fingeroth created and edited Write Now magazine, the only how-to publication dedicated to comics writing and writers. He is co-author (with artist Mike Manley) of How to Create Comics from Script to Print, as well as its companion DVD. He’s also written the books Superman on the Couch, Disguised as Clark Kent, and The Rough Guide to Graphic Novels, and co-edited (with Roy Thomas) The Stan Lee Universe, about the life and career of the co-creator of Iron Man and The X-Men. Fingeroth serves on the board of directors of the Institute for Comics Studies. His online writing course “Graphic Novel Writing,” which teaches the entire graphic novel writing process, from producing a proposal to handling Hollywood, starts May 23 at mediabistro.com.

Dear Heather…

The graphic novel market is an especially tricky one. Because of the time and specialized skills required to create a graphic novel, advances are often fairly high to enable the writer and artist to live while they’re working on it. Plus, outside the work-for-hire world of Marvel and DC superheroes, there is really no way to accurately predict what a GN by someone relatively unknown in the field will sell. Is your husband the artist as well as the writer? Either way, having pages of the story drawn and lettered to include with the proposal is generally a good idea, although there is the chance that some editors may not like the look of the art, and so may reject the story even if they like the writing, and even if you make it clear you would be willing to work with another artist. In addition, the “hybrid” part of the description may be confusing or off-putting to some editors. Many graphic novelists are turning to Kickstarter and other crowd-funding venues to finance their work. That may be an option worth exploring for you.

Sincerely,
Danny Fingeroth

Guest Editor Taryn Fagerness re: Did I Just Double-Cross My Agent?

/

Dear Editor…

I have an agent in the U.S, and I’ve been extended an offer for representation in Turkey. I’d heard of authors having an agent for non-English speaking country aside from their agent in the U.S., so I accepted the offer; however, now, I feel that it’s somehow unethical. Can I have an agent in both countries or should I sever ties with one?

Signed,
Double Agent Girl

Taryn FagernessTaryn Fagerness represents foreign rights on behalf of North American literary agents. Before opening the Taryn Fagerness Agency in 2009, Taryn spent five years as the Subsidiary Rights Manager and an Agent at the Sandra Dijkstra Literary Agency. She’s sold hundreds of books to foreign, audio, and film markets, and has sold subsidiary rights for New York Times bestselling authors, first time authors, and everyone in between, in nearly all genres including literary fiction, thriller/suspense, commercial fiction, romance, history, self-help, business, and children’s.

Dear Double Agent Girl…

I’m afraid I need to start my answer with another question, and that is: How does your US agent handle foreign rights? All agents I know handle their authors’ foreign rights in some fashion, so that you should definitely not need to form individual relationships with foreign agents. For example, I am a freelance foreign rights manager, and I handle over 20 North American agencies’ foreign rights. I work with foreign co-agents all around the world (like Turkey) so that my agent clients (and their authors) don’t have to deal with the mess and complication of doing that all on their own. Other US agencies have an in-house foreign rights manager who handles foreign rights.

Now, foreign agencies from Turkey and Korea (don’t ask me why it’s these two territories in particular) are infamous for trolling for new clients, and they often contact authors directly saying they want to rep your book in their country. If you have a US agent, you should just forward such requests to them. Your US agent may already have an exclusive relationship with a Turkish agent. If your US agent doesn’t know how to handle such requests, it may be time for a new agent.

So, in short, your US agent should be your main squeeze. They should handle all your subsidiary rights for you (and they may work with co-agents around the world, or in the world of film to do this).

A tip for all writers seeking a US agent: be sure to ask potential agents “How do you handle foreign rights?”

Write on,
Taryn

Revision Week: Winner and Week Off

Dear Readers…

I hope you enjoyed DearEditor.com’s second annual Revision Week. I created this event to bring you insights and inspiration as you work through the ups and downs of revision, and I’m honored that six amazing authors helped me do that. Thanks to them and to you all for joining in with your comments, and congrats to the giveaway winners, including Fiona Ivey, winner of yesterday’s Free Full Manuscript Edit giveaway. If you haven’t had your fill of revision insights, click here for last year’s interviews. And now I shall take a breather for a week, returning on April 8 to the usual format, with answers to the craft and industry questions you wonder about. Until then…

Happy revising!
The Editor

The Editor is grateful for the authors who made this year’s Revision Week informative, inspiring, and fun. In case you missed any of the interviews, here are the direct links:

Larry Dane Brimner, author of 150 books for readers of all ages. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=4875

Laura Griffin, New York Times bestselling author of 11 romantic suspense novels. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=4931

Bruce Hale, author/illustrator of nearly 30 books for kids. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=4958

Matthew J. Kirby, breakout author of two popular novels for young adults, with two more anticipated novels. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=4983

Susan Stevens Crummel, author and co-author of nearly twenty popular picture books for children. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=5008

Peter Economy, bestselling author and ghostwriter of more than 6o books. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=5039

Revision Week: Peter Economy

Dear Readers…

We end Revision Week with a master of nonfiction and ghostwriting, Peter Economy. Peter is the bestselling author and ghostwriter of more than 6o books. He’s collaborated with thought leaders in a variety of different industries and organizations – from Fortune 100 businesses to universities to non-profits with national reach. The Editor is thrilled to wrap up this great week with Peter’s sage advise.

Today also brings us to the grand finale giveaway: the Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Read the full post for details for entering the giveaway.

peter_economyPeter Economy’s 60+ books include Managing For Dummies, The SAIC Solution: How We Built an $8 Billion Employee-Owned Technology Company, and Giving Back: Connecting You, Business, and Community. Peter has also served as Associate Editor for the New York City-based Leader to Leader magazine since 2001, recently served as a lecturer at San Diego State University (teaching MGT 453: Creativity and Innovation), is a member of the National Advisory Council of The Art of Science Learning, and is a founding member of the board of SPORTS for Exceptional Athletes.

*After Peter’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway.

How does revision work within a collaboration?
WCBFD EconomyWhen collaborating with someone else (most of my books are collaborations), I usually revise their work, and they revise mine. In the case of Writing Children’s Books For Dummies, for example, my coauthor/collaborator Lisa Rojany Buccieri and I split the chapters we were each responsible for—she prepared initial drafts of some chapters and I prepared initial drafts of others. We then traded chapters and edited each other’s work.

How does working with a new collaborator for a new project and each new audience affect your approach to shaping the book?
Every collaborator has his or her own approach and style, so it takes a little bit of time at the beginning of a new project to mesh that with my own approach and style. Most of the time it all works out and the collaboration goes smoothly. In some rare cases it doesn’t, and if we can’t get on the same page we part ways.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
Giving BackI only send final drafts to my editors—my very best work. Sometimes the editors do very little revising after I submit this final draft, and sometimes they do a lot—it depends on the project and the editor’s own approach. But I would never send an editor anything less than my very best.

How does revision work in ghostwriting? How do you strike a balance between your judgment as a writer and the preferences of the person you’re writing for?
The balance is that I am the writing expert and my client is the content expert. Sometimes I need to strongly express my opinions and provide my advice about making revisions, based on my many years of experience as a professional writer. This (in addition to the actual writing) is what my clients pay me for. Regardless, it is extremely important that I capture my client’s voice and that he or she is comfortable with the style and happy with the book that results. If I haven’t accomplished that, then I have failed.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a project while revising?
saicIn a few cases I have had to throw out an entire table of contents—the approach that a collaborator and I were going to take to write the book—and start over from scratch. Fortunately we did this before we wrote the manuscript and not after.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
When the deadline arrives and I know the manuscript is good enough. Absolute perfection is not necessary, but it better be damn close.

TODAY’S GRAND PRIZE GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away a FREE FULL MANUSCRIPT EDIT of your manuscript. The edit will be a “Substantive Edit,” in which the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience, as The Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.” Note that the manuscript can be fiction, nonfiction, or picture books.

Here are the rules:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or nonfiction), including picture books.
  2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE and SHALL NOT EXCEED 90,000 WORDS. In the case of a picture book entry, the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 30, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 31, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Full MS Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript, YOUR FULL NAME, and the CATEGORY/GENRE of your project. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this Revision Week giveaway to get additional entries today. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title, full name, and the category/genre in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Susan Stevens Crummel

Dear Readers…

Four authors and four Free Partial Edit Giveaway winners later, we’ve reached the penultimate day of Revision Week. It’s been fascinating to see the varied revision processes of these talented, prolific writers. Today and tomorrow bring us two more generous authors, another Free Partial Edit Giveaway, and the grand finale Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway.

Today, a glimpse into picture book revision and author/illustrator collaboration with Susan Stevens Crummel, who has authored and co-authored nearly twenty popular picture books for children. Please join Susan and The Editor and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Susan Stevens CrummelSusan Stevens Crummel‘s books with her most frequent collaborator, author/illustrator (and sister!) Janet Stevens, include Help Me, Mr. Mutt!, one of Time Magazine’s Top 10 Children’s Books of 2008 and winner of the 2010 Texas Bluebonnet Award and the 2010 Florida Children’s Book Award, The Great Fuzz Frenzy, winner of the Bill Martin, Jr. Picture Book Award and 10 state book awards, Cook-a-Doodle-Doo!, winner of the 2001 Texas Bluebonnet Award, and And the Dish Ran Away with the Spoon, winner of the 2004 California Young Reader Medal. Their newest book, The Little Red Pen, was inspired by their longtime editor, Houghton Mifflin Harcourt Editorial Director Jeannette Larson. The Editor is honored to have assisted in the editing of several of those books. Unlike Jeannette, however, The Editor did not get a really cool nickname. (A-hem, Susie.)

*After Susan’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

When you write a new picture book manuscript, how many drafts does it typically take before you’ll show it to an editor?
We write and rewrite for several months. I’m not sure of the number of drafts–maybe 20?

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
More than before.

You sometimes collaborate with your sister, illustrator Janet Stevens. How does that collaboration work?
dishbigWe start with an idea, usually Janet’s idea, we talk about it, then she starts to draw and I start to write. Janet e-mails me her sketches and I e-mail her a draft of the story. Janet prints out my e-mail, writes all over it, and faxes it back to me. I incorporate her handwritten notes, craft the next draft, and e-mail it back to her. She prints it out, writes all over it, and faxes it back to me, and so on.

red_pen_cover betterMany phone calls, faxes, and e-mails later, we share the manuscript and storyboard with Jeannette Larson. She gets out her little red pen (the title of our latest book, by the way) and sticky notes and goes to work! Many conference calls, faxes, and e-mails later, the manuscript is set (we think) and Janet creates a dummy. As the art and the story begin to come together, the manuscript changes again. We feel that this is what makes our collaboration successful–it’s an organic process where the story and art evolve together, meshing to create a more cohesive product.

Icookbig can think of only positives with regard to our collaboration. The phrase “two heads are better than one” seems cliche, but it’s true. And we are a “fit” because we share the same sense of humor! Yes, we bug each other sometimes–we’re very different. I’m organized, detail oriented, neat, and a little INSIDE THE BOX. She is creative, artistic, messy, and totally OUTSIDE THE BOX. I call her Miss Messy and she calls me Miss Prissy Pants. But it’s the balance of these two opposites that makes it work. Plug in Jeannette as the referee, and VOILA! The perfect collaboration.

Here is a funny recipe for collaboration that I wrote several years ago:

Recipe for Collaborating
Janet Stevens and Susan Stevens Crummel

1 older sister, well-seasoned
1 much, much younger sister (wash thoroughly to remove paint)
1 far-fetched idea
Numerous communication devices – fax machines, cell phones, regular phones, computers with Internet access
1 editor: Jeannette – the Little Red Pen
(1)   Put far-fetched idea in same container with two sisters. Set in warm place to rise (like Hawaii).
(2)   Separate sisters. May need crowbar.
(3)   Use communication devices to link. Allow creative juices to flow back and forth until mixture begins to bubble. Turn up the heat until it is well done.
(4)   Sprinkle with laughter.
(5)   Add corn.
(6)   Send mixture to Jeannette.
(7)   Take out corn.
(8)   Repeat steps 3 – 7 until Jeannette is exhausted or the deadline passes, whichever comes first.
SERVES THOUSANDS.

Do you use Janet or other critique partners for the books you write solo?
Bart cover with shadowI use Janet and Dorothy Donohue, my other illustrator.

Do you share your manuscripts with kids to test them out?
Yes, when possible.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?
plaid coverI wrote Plaidypus Lost for Holiday House and it was completely in rhyme. After many revisions I met with Regina in New York, our editor at the time. She said, “Take it out of rhyme and no sappy ending.” I nearly fainted. The entire project changed from that point on.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
When the deadline arrives. We still try to change things after that . . . sometimes we can, sometime we can’t.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 29, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 30, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Matthew J. Kirby

Dear Readers…

Day 4 of Revision Week brings us to middle grade novels and the delightful Matthew J. Kirby, Edgar Award-winning author of two popular novels for young readers, with two more novels releasing this year, including the fifth book in Scholastic’s mega-hit, multi-platform Infinity Ring series.

Please join Matthew and The Editor as they compare revising a novel within a multi-author series to revising a solo novel, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

 

Matthew_s_Portrait_-30__30Matthew J. Kirby is the breakout author of two popular novels for middle grade readers—the critically acclaimed The Clockwork Three, which has published in seven countries, and Icefall, winner of the Edgar Award for Best Juvenile Mystery and the PEN Center USA Literary Award for Children’s Literature. (Scholastic’s stunning trailer for The Clockwork Three can be viewed here.) Matthew is currently finishing up revisions for TWO novels: The Lost Kingdom and Cave of Wonders, Book 5 of the hit multi-platform Infinity Ring series. Both new novels will hit stores September 2013.

*After Matthew’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
0-545-20337-6To begin with, I don’t have typical drafts in the way many people think of them. I’m a very linear writer, and I revise very heavily as I go along. If a scene isn’t working, I can’t move on until it does. If a character isn’t working, I have to sort that out before I can write further. If I suddenly realize that I’ve neglected to lay the groundwork for a particular plot development, I stop what I’m writing and go back to take care of that. It’s just the way I’m wired. The result is that any given scene in a book might have gone through several revisions, or it might remain the way I wrote it down the first time through. My confidence in how the characters and scenes are working doesn’t seem tied in any way to the number of times I’ve revised them, but to my general awareness of the story as a whole. I just have to trust my instincts about whether something is working, or something isn’t.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
Icefall CvrMy editor sees the book pretty much as soon as I’m satisfied with the final scene. Because of the way I write, everything preceding it is as good as I can get it, and now I need her outside perspective to help me look at the book from new angles, to spot the problems I’ve missed. There’s quite a bit of revision that takes place after she looks at it. Some of it is thematic, some of it structural, some of it rooted in the character dynamics. (For example, I switched one of the characters in Icefall from a girl to a boy during that process.) Some of it is cosmetic. (Awkward phrasing, redundancy, and that sort of thing.) All of it makes the book better, and I’m grateful to her for that.

Do you use critique partners?
Yes, I have a writer’s group that I’ve been a part of for seven or eight years now. Until I moved, I met with them weekly, in person. They are all very dedicated and talented people. I’ve learned so much from them over the years, and gained so much from our work together (one of them actually suggested the character switch I made in Icefall). Now, when I can, I meet with them over skype. I also send stuff to a few trusted readers and friends occasionally.

You’ve said that your upcoming middle-grade adventure The Lost Kingdom (Sept 2013), which first attracted the attention of your agent, went through a major overhaul. How did you know it wasn’t working? What was the key to the revision success?
The Lost Kingdom cvrThe book that would become The Lost Kingdom was the first piece of novel-length fiction I’d ever attempted. I didn’t know what I was doing, really, and I couldn’t see what or if anything was wrong with it. But Stephen Fraser (now my agent) saw through those mistakes. I think in retrospect he recognized it as a first novel, because his advice was to put it aside and write something new. That wasn’t exactly what I wanted to hear. I wanted him to help me fix whatever was wrong with the thing. But I took his suggestion, and wrote The Clockwork Three. Then I wrote Icefall, and after that I started to think maybe I could go back to that first attempt with fresh eyes. When I did, I saw that it wasn’t working at a pretty fundamental level. So fundamental, I deleted the file and started from scratch. I think it was just the time and distance from the story that allowed me to see it, and now the book is completely different from that first attempt.

Infinity Ring Cave of Wonders cvrYou’re writing an installment in the Infinity Ring series: Infinity Ring, Book 5: Cave of Wonders (Sept 2013). How does the revision process work in a multi-author, multi-platform series?
Working on the Infinity Ring series has been a blast. We’ve all had a lot of freedom to go where we want to go with our individual books, while also contributing to the overarching story. The process has been a bit like passing a baton. In the beginning, we had some conference calls and a meeting with all of us in New York, just kicking ideas around. I had some long conversations with Matt de la Pena, whose book comes right before mine, because I wanted to pick the characters up where he’d left them off, emotionally. I think all of us have relied heavily on the amazing editors of the series at Scholastic, who have had the unenviable job of keeping us all on target, and making sure the books gel together

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
When my editor tells me it’s the final draft!

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 28, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 29, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Bruce Hale

Dear Readers…

Day 3 of Revision Week brings us the prolifically funny Bruce Hale, whose three chapter book series keep kids (and The Editor) laughing. When The Editor interviewed him for Revision Week, Bruce was in the thick of revising his second book in the SCHOOL FOR S.P.I.E.S. series: Thicker Than Water. “Revision is in the air!” he declared.

Please join Bruce and The Editor as they explore revising series, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

BHbySonyaBruce Hale is the Edgar Award-nominated author-illustrator of nearly 30 funny books for young readers, including the popular Chet Gecko Mysteries, the Underwhere series, and the picture book Snoring Beauty, one of Oprah’s Recommended Reads for Kids. You can find Bruce online at www.brucehale.com or sign up for his fun and insightful e-newsletter of writing tips at www.brucehalewritingtips.com.

*After Bruce’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about character and story choices you made for a new story concept?
School for SpiesFor me, coming up with the first book in a new series is typically a revision-intensive process. I’ve sometimes done as many as five or six drafts before the voice and characters really start to gel. In my newest series, SCHOOL FOR S.P.I.E.S., for example, I did five drafts before I even felt comfortable showing it to author friends and agent for feedback.

When you’re writing a series, you know your characters well. How many drafts are needed once you get a series established? What kinds of things are you refining at that level?
Once the series is established, things get much easier. I know the characters and I know the voice, so these books take a lot less revision — typically only three or four drafts before I deliver the manuscript (depending on the complexity of the book). At this stage of a series, my revisions focus on different matters: making sure the characters and voice are consistent from book to book; ensuring plenty of variety in the jokes, plot twists, and so forth; and finding ways to keep things familiar but fresh.

How early does your editor come into each new book?
Chameleon Wore ChartreuseThis varies pretty widely, depending on the book, series, and editor. With CHET GECKO, I would sometimes toss around plot ideas with my editor before I even started the book. With most other series, however, my editor doesn’t come into the process until I have a draft I’m pretty satisfied with — usually #3 or 4.

The Underwhere series is your second series. Did the first manuscript fall into place quickly, or did it take a few rounds to settle into the new characters and voices?
prince_of_underwhereThe UNDERWHERE series was tricky to write, the first book requiring about a year of revision. My first challenge was keeping the series’ voice distinct from my CHET GECKO books. Then I had to create characters that were different enough from the ones I’d been writing in my previous series. And finally, I had to learn how to write the comic-book chapters of the story, which required an approach much closer to screenwriting than novel writing. LOTS of revision was involved in that first book, PRINCE OF UNDERWHERE.

Do you use critique partners?
Although I was part of a critique group years ago, I haven’t been for quite some time. However, I do have writer friends who are kind enough to read and comment on story drafts on an ad-hoc basis, and I do the same for them.

Do you share your manuscripts with kids to test them out?
My first SCHOOL FOR S.P.I.E.S. book was the first time I’d done that. I gave it to a friend’s daughter who was just slightly older than my target readers, and she gave me some great feedback.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?
I’ve changed the voice from omniscient to first-person, and finally settled on third-person POV. That was pretty drastic, and required TONS of extra revision. But it was worth it, for finding the POV that best suited that story.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
When I can’t find anything else to tinker with, and I have that general feeling that if I mess with it much more, the entire souffle will collapse in a soggy heap — that’s when I know it’s the final draft.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 27, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 28, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Laura Griffin

/

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues with New York Times bestselling author Laura Griffin. Laura has written eleven award-winning novels, six of them in the popular Tracers series. She’s just put the finishing touches on the seventh book in the series, Exposed, which will release on June 25.

Please join Laura and The Editor for Day 2 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Laura GriffinLaura Griffin’s background as a journalist serves her well as a novelist—she’s constantly interviewing experts and researching facts for her novels in an effort to ground her fictional adventures in enough reality to give them a sense of possibility. For her bestselling Tracers series, which features a forensic photographer and an FBI agent who form an uneasy partnership to find a vicious criminal, Laura interviewed FBI agents, private investigators, crime scene investigators, and forensic artists. Her hard work is recognized by readers and reviewers and has earned her various awards, including both a RITA Award for Whisper of Warning and a Daphne du Maurier Award for Untraceable in 2010. Her debut novel, One Last Breath, won the Booksellers Best Award in the Romantic Suspense category, and her novels Snapped, Unspeakable, and Untraceable were all nominated for Reviewers’ Choice Awards by RT Book Reviews magazine. The Editor is honored to have Laura with us for Revision Week.

*After Laura’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
Thanks for inviting me to be part of Revision Week! Every author I know has a different process and it’s interesting to hear how people do it.

For me, I become more and more confident about my character and story choices as I near the end of the first draft. Sometimes after the book is finished and the story is “percolating” I will realize some aspect of the plot isn’t true to character, so I’ll go back and make changes.

exposed_225How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
My editor will send me a revision letter with lots of ideas about what is working and what needs more focus. Sometimes I will overhaul an element of the suspense plot or develop a character more fully. Sometimes I will cut a character or subplot altogether if it’s distracting too much from the main story. I try to get all of my major changes into that round of revisions so that I don’t drive everyone crazy at the line-editing and copy-editing phase.

Do you use critique partners?
Nope, never have.

whisper_225 Your romantic storylines are as prominent in your books as your thriller plotlines. How does this dual prominence affect your revision strategy?
I think it’s important to have a balance, but I always try to remember that no matter how compelling a plot is, the reader is really in it for the characters. So I try to make sure I focus plenty of attention on character arc so that the story will have an emotional punch.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?
I write suspense stories, so sometimes the logistics get complicated and I feel like I’ve hit a wall. But I have learned to tap into the experts I know for help. For example, I had a plot problem once involving an airplane flight, so I called up a pilot friend and explained that I needed my characters to be crossing a border at a certain time and place and he came up with a plausible way to make it work.

Sometimes you just need to get some distance from your story and a plot solution will come to you.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising? lastbreath_225
Cutting scenes always feels drastic to me. I try not to get hung up on all the time I spent creating something that ends up on the cutting room floor, but that’s the way it goes sometimes.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
I don’t ever really feel like the story is final. I certainly never feel like it’s perfect. But you pour your heart and soul into it and then eventually let go and hope what you’ve written will touch someone.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 26, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 27, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Picture Book Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Larry Dane Brimner

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week kicks off with Larry Dane Brimner, the award-winning author of more than 150 books for readers of all ages. His nonfiction books for children and young adults include Birmingham Sunday, an Orbis Pictus Honor Book for Outstanding Nonfiction for Children, and We Are One: The Story of Bayard Rustin, a Norman A. Sugarman Children’s Biography Award winner.

Please join Larry and The Editor for Day 1 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Larry Dane BrimnerLarry Dane Brimner began to focus on writing for young people during his twenty-year teaching career. His books have garnered awards and the praise of reviewers, teachers, and readers. The Editor is privileged to talk researching, writing, and revising with Larry over tacos every few months and is thrilled to be able to share his revision process with DearEditor.com readers.

*After Larry’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

When you write a picture book, how many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?
I’ve found that the number of drafts it takes to get any manuscript “right” is directly related to the amount of time I’ve spent thinking about a project before I stand in front of my computer station to compose. On one occasion, it took me one draft, or about 45 minutes, to write an early reader; such an experience hasn’t duplicated itself. Looking back over my manuscripts, I’d say it usually takes at least a dozen drafts and, often, as many as thirty. These aren’t full revisions, however, since I always begin a writing session—whether writing a picture book, a chapter book, or nonfiction—by reading the manuscript aloud from the top. As I go along, I tweak words and phrases, I eliminate sentences or passages that don’t seem to work after sleeping on the story for a night, I add words and passages that I think are missing. I number and save each writing session/draft at the end of the day so if I need to retrieve something I’ll still have it. This “process” isn’t the one writing teachers typically teach; that is, I don’t rush to get words on the page so I’ll have a draft to revise. I plod. There’s no other way to describe it because some days I only get a sentence or two written. And I revise as I go, knowing full well that there will come a time when the entire finished manuscript—“finished” in my eyes, at least—will come under the microscope. Perhaps this is the result of a slightly OCD personality that won’t allow me to comfortably move forward until what’s already on the page (or screen) is at least satisfactory for the moment. What it does allow is for me to become familiar with my characters and their quirks; it allows me to “find” the story I think I’m telling.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?
My editors see nothing until I’m satisfied that I can’t do anything else with the story being told. Quite honestly, sometimes I’ve been in such a rush to get something out to an editor that I haven’t allowed enough time between that final review and the post office (or send key). Many times I’ll sit down to look at a story a week after it has been sent to an editor, and I think, Oh, cripes! Of course, then it’s too late. So I now force myself to put a project away for at least a week and often longer before sharing it with an editor. birmingham sundayIf you’re looking for a number, I can point out that my nonfiction editor didn’t see Birmingham Sunday until the forty-ninth draft/version (and then there were edits and revisions after that—too many to count).

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?
I touched on this above. I recall that with my picture bookMerry Christmas old Armadillo Merry Christmas, Old Armadillo, I wasn’t as specific and detailed as I thought I’d been. My editor asked me what kind of wreath was on the door and what kind of door it was. Details. This was conveyed to me in an editorial letter that was as long as the manuscript itself (or longer). After giving thought to my editor’s suggestions, questions, and comments, I came up with the following: “Roadrunner shook his head and helped Peccary hang her piney wreath on the ancient door.” This conveys everything I thought had been evident but wasn’t. I mean, in my mind, wreaths are always piney but, of course, they’re not, and doors on old adobe casitas are always ancient. With my picture book The Littlest Wolf, that editor (who did not write editorial letters) and I spent three or four marathon sessions on the phone revising line by line. It was truly the most frustrating experience I’ve ever had. (I can say this because the editor is no longer in the business. I like to mull things over, consider options, look at it on the page before I commit to something.) Having been in this business for thirty years, I can say that editors today expect things to come to them in a more or less finished state; many don’t have the time to work with a writer to refine and polish a story. And I understand this, but it sure was nice when an editor would see a glimmer of an idea in a story and work with the author to uncover it. To answer your question, though, I would say that after an editor sees my work, I can look forward to three or four more complete drafts of a text before it is ready for publication. (With nonfiction, it may be more!)

How does your revision process change when you write nonfiction?
Gosh, that’s a good question. I would say that with fiction, I want to make sure the story has been completely told and that I’ve wrapped up all the loose ends. If there was an event in chapter three or four, I want to make sure that if it needs a conclusion that conclusion has been provided. In a picture book, I want to make sure that the single concept I’m addressing in the story is conveyed as simply and with as few words as possible, yet that it is done in an artful way. I tend to write longer nonfiction, so when I revise my nonfiction I want to make sure that factual information has been included about each concept I’ve touched on. Sometimes I can do this with a simple in-line explanation, but other times I feel that a sidebar is more appropriate.black and white In Black & White, for example I made reference to Autherine Lucy and her attempt to integrate the University of Alabama. I knew kids/readers wouldn’t know who she was or how she came to the university, so I expanded on her story in a sidebar. At other times, something doesn’t work in the main text because it would tend to pull a reader away from the story I’m telling and yet, it’s interesting enough (to me, at least) to be included somewhere. So I’ll use a sidebar just to give the reader a bit more information. I did this again in Black & White when I provided a sidebar about the South’s “Declaration of Constitutional Principals,” which has been in the news recently with regard to state’s rights.

Do you use critique partners?
No. I read everything aloud. Over and over and over. Having said that, I sometimes will use an editorial service, but I’ve only done that twice when I’ve been uncertain about a project. (Neither of those projects was ever placed, by the way.) I tend to trust my own judgment and, of course, I work with some amazing editors whose guidance I trust implicitly. One of the reasons I don’t rely on critique partners is because early on in my career when I was focusing on early readers and picture books, I went to one (the only one I could find) and the advice I got was to “use more contractions.” Well, the publishers whose doors I was trying to break down didn’t allow contractions. So that was my last visit to a critique group. I know many successful writers who do use their critique partners to refine their work, but it’s not for me.

Do you ever read your picture book manuscripts (fiction or nonfiction) to kids to test them out?
Never. Kids typically will like almost anything an adult writes simply because they’re happy that someone is spending time with them.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?
Absolutely. WithTrick or treat old armadillo Trick or Treat, Old Armadillo, I needed to figure out how an established character (established in Merry Christmas, Old Armadillo) could turn the tables on his friends and actually surprise them when he is historically the one surprised. I also needed to do it in a way that would not reveal the surprise too soon because I didn’t want readers/listeners to know the surprise before the story characters. I noodled with this one section—near the end of the story—for two solid months. Finally, one night at two a.m. (which is when I do a lot of thinking) I figured out what the surprise, or trick, would be. Then all I had to do was noodle with the language or telling of the story (another month or so) so kids (and the illustrator) would understand what just happened. I wrote:

Outside . . . feet scuffed upon flagstones.

Inside . . . Old Armadillo slowly pulled a blanket over his head.

Outside . . . (page turn) A paw pounded thrice against the door.

Inside . . . Old Armadillo shifted and squirmed beneath the blanket.

Outside . . . a chilling voice called, “It is time!”

Inside . . . under the blanket, Old Armadillo grew as still and silent as stone.

So what I’ve accomplished with this passage is to (I hope) put the scare into what is about to happen when the characters outside Old Armadillo’s casita finally enter. I’ve also accomplished Old Armadillo’s change of costume without revealing what he’s doing under the blanket to the reader/listener. Then, after another brief passage to further set the tone/mood of the story and another page turn, Old Armadillo reveals himself when, “Suddenly, Old Armadillo flung the blanket aside,” and his voice thunders out from a jack-o’-lantern, “Quiero Halloween!” It is a very simple passage that took months to settle on and get right.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a text while revising?
The most drastic thing I’ve ever done is to lose an entire finished manuscript when my disk crashed. (Who knew that thumb drives weren’t forever!) It could not be recovered and all I had were bits and pieces of notes on my computer and a deadline one month away. Literally, after crying for half an hour, I told myself to buck up and start over. It turned out that the new, revised-from-scratch manuscript was much tighter than the original and I delivered it on time. The dumbest thing I’ve ever done was to hear an editor say, “The revision should be easy. It’s just a little thing in the last chapter. Can you have it to me by the end of the month?” I waited until a week before the revision was due to even look at the editorial comments and when I did, it hit me: If you make a little change in the last chapter, it has to be set up in each preceding chapter. I’ve made that mistake only once. This was a chapter book, but it applies to picture books as well: If you make a change to the last scene, chances are good that you’re going to have to set it up in each preceding scene. As I think about it, though, perhaps the most drastic thing I’ve done is to put a text away in my “Stinky Story Drawer” and give up on it.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?
This is difficult for me to answer because I don’t think I ever really know. But there’s usually a gut feeling or instinct I get that tells me that this is the final draft and I can’t do anything to make it any better. It tells me that this draft is worthy of publication (even when I can’t find an editor who agrees with me). And this brings to mind a note of encouragement. I once had a picture book rejected. The editor sent a letter pointing out all the story’s flaws and wished me better luck next time. I filed that story in my Stinky Story Drawer for two years. Then one day when I was looking for something to revise (rather than start), I pulled that story out, read it, and said to myself. “You know, this is good.” I sent the story to the very same editor with a note that said, “I’ve had two years to consider your comments. Will you look at it again?” This time she called and said, “The changes you made are brilliant. It sparkles now. I want to offer a contract.” Of course, I’d made no changes; I didn’t even print out a fresh copy. So there is always hope for a story, even one that has been rejected and landed in the Stinky Story Drawer.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is celebrating Revision Week by giving away a FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST TEN PAGES of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 25, 2013, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 26, 2013, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Picture Book Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Welcome to DearEditor.com’s 2013 Revision Week!

Dear Readers…

This week DearEditor.com brings together six prolific, bestselling, award-winning authors for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day—and enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

*Giveaway directions will be posted each with the interviews, starting tomorrow.

Welcome to a week of free edit giveaways (directions to be posted each day starting tomorrow) and revision advice and insights like these…

Larry Dane BrimnerLarry Dane Brimner, author of 150 books for readers of all ages. “The number of drafts it takes to get any manuscript “right” is directly related to the amount of time I’ve spent thinking about a project before I stand in front of my computer station to compose.”

Laura GriffinLaura Griffin,New York Times bestselling romance writer, with 11 acclaimed novels. “I always try to remember that no matter how compelling a plot is, the reader is really in it for the characters. So I try to make sure I focus plenty of attention on character arc so that the story will have an emotional punch.”

BHbySonyaBruce Hale, award-winning author/illustrator of nearly 30 books for kids. “When I can’t find anything else to tinker with, and I have that general feeling that if I mess with it much more, the entire souffle will collapse in a soggy heap — that’s when I know it’s the final draft.”

Matthew_s_Portrait_-30__30Matthew J. Kirby, breakout author of two novels for young adults, with two more anticipated novels. “My confidence in how the characters and scenes are working doesn’t seem tied in anyway to the number of times I’ve revised them, but to my general awareness of the story as a whole.”

Susan Stevens CrummelSusan Stevens Crummel,author and co-author of nearly 20 picture books. “We feel that this is what makes our collaboration successful–it’s an organic process where the story and art evolve together, meshing to create a more cohesive product.”

peter_economyPeter Economy, bestselling author and ghostwriter of more than 6o books. “It is extremely important that I capture my client’s voice and that he or she is comfortable with the style and happy with the book that results. If I haven’t accomplished that, then I have failed.”

Thank you for joining us. Tomorrow, Larry Dane Brimner pulls back the curtain on the revision process.

NEWSFLASH: Revision Week Just Got Bigger!

Dear Readers…

The Editor is thrilled to announce that award-winning picture book author Susan Stevens Crummel will be joining the Revision Week lineup! Loved for her solo books as well as her collaborations with author/illustrator (and sister!) Janet Stevens, Susan will shed light on the ins and outs of working through a highly collaborative revision process.

Read the rest of the post to learn about Susan…

Join us for seven days of free edit giveaways and revision talk here on DearEditor.com, starting March 24!

Susan Stevens CrummelSusan Stevens Crummel has authored and co-authored nearly twenty popular picture books for children. Her books with her most frequent collaborator, author/illustrator (and sister!) Janet Stevens, include Help Me, Mr. Mutt!, one of Time Magazine’s Top 10 Children’s Books of 2008 and winner of the 2010 Texas Bluebonnet Award and the 2010 Florida Children’s Book Award, The Great Fuzz Frenzy, winner of the Bill Martin, Jr. Picture Book Award and 10 state book awards, Cook-a-Doodle-Doo!, winner of the 2001 Texas Bluebonnet Award, and And the Dish Ran Away with the Spoon, winner of the 2004 California Young Reader Medal.

Announcing DearEditor.com’s Revision Week 2013, March 24-30!

Dear Readers…

Heads up! It’s almost time for DearEditor.com’s second annual Revision Week. The Editor is honored to host five authors—who have published a combined 270 best-selling and award-winning books—for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day—and enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

Read the rest of the post to learn about the authors participating…

Mark your calendar for a week of free edit giveaways and revision talk with these talented and generous authors:

Larry Dane BrimnerLarry Dane Brimner has published 150 books for readers of all ages. His award-winning picture books, easy readers, chapter books, and nonfiction for children and young adults include Birmingham Sunday, an Orbis Pictus Honor Book for Outstanding Nonfiction for Children.

 

Laura GriffinLaura Griffin is a New York Times bestselling romance writer. Her eleven acclaimed novels have won various awards, including both a RITA Award for Whisper of Warning and a Daphne du Maurier Award for Untraceable.

 

BHbySonyaBruce Hale is the author/illustrator of nearly 30 books for kids, including the popular Chet Gecko Mysteries (one of which was an Edgar Award Finalist), the comics-novel hybrid Underwhere series, and Snoring Beauty, one of Oprah’s Recommended Reads for Kids. Currently, he’s hard at work revising the second book in his SCHOOL FOR S.P.I.E.S. series.

Matthew_s_Portrait_-30__30 Matthew J. Kirby is the breakout author of two popular novels for young adults, including Icefall, winner of the Edgar Award for Best Juvenile Mystery and the PEN Center USA Literary Award for Children’s Literature, and two more anticipated novels: The Lost Kingdom and Cave of Wonders, Book 5 of the hit multi-platform Infinity Ring series.

peter_economy Peter Economy is the bestselling author and ghostwriter of more than 6o books, including  Managing For Dummies, The SAIC Solution: How We Built an $8 Billion Employee-Owned Technology Company, Giving Back: Connecting You, Business, and Community, and many others. He’s collaborated with thought leaders in a variety of different industries and organizations – from Fortune 100 businesses to universities to non-profits with national reach.

Photo credits: Bruce Hale author photo © Sonya Sones, Laura Griffin author photo © Laura Griffin

Guest Editor Sara Sciuto re: Should I Submit My Picture Book Dummy to Agents & Editors Simultaneously?

//

Dear Editor…

If I submit a picture book dummy to a publisher, may I also query an agent about the same pb, as long as I state it is a “simultaneous” submission? I am thinking of finding an agent. Is this a turn-off to the agent if the ms is out there?

Thanks for the advice!
Lisa

 

Sara SciutoSara Sciuto, today’s Guest Editor, is an agent with Full Circle Literary, representing children’s fiction (picture books, middle grade, and YA) and select adult nonfiction. A graduate of the University of California, San Diego, Sara also completed literature coursework at NYU. Before joining Full Circle, she gained valuable experience working on film and foreign rights with the Taryn Fagerness Agency. Her great passions in life are travel and good food – and good books, of course! (Website: www.fullcircleliterary.com, Twitter: @sarasciuto, Blog: http://sarasciuto.tumblr.com/)

Dear Lisa…

Great question! It does happen sometimes that an author will let me know that their material is currently under review at a publishing house (usually because they had an open invitation from attending a conference), and that’s fine as long as they let us know. However, I wouldn’t suggest planning on submitting to agencies and publishing houses simultaneously while you’re trying to find an agent. Here’re a few reasons why: (1) It could be a deterrent to an interested agent if we learn it’s already been submitted to multiple houses (that’s fewer chances we have to get it sold). (2) Most agents are fairly hands-on editorially (I know I am!) and will work with you to make your project stronger before ever submitting to publishers. You only have one shot with a particular publishing house/imprint so you want your project in its best possible shape before submitting. Having an agent on your side BEFORE you submit will help you make it all the more strong and appealing to publishers. (3) When an author/illustrator (which I assume you are if you’re submitting a dummy rather than just a manuscript) meets an editor at a conference and submits a dummy, that author is typically only sending one project to one publishing house. An agent is able to send the project to several editors at one time in order to find the best match for your project. There you have it—three reasons why I suggest securing an agent before submitting your work to publishers.

Best wishes,
Sara Sciuto

Happy Holidays!

Dear Readers…

With this post, I bid you farewell for the rest of the year. DearEditor.com will be back in January with more questions and answers about the craft and business of publishing. See you in 2013.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Happy New Year

Guest Editor Stacy Innerst: The Risk of Illustration Notes in Picture Books Manuscripts

//

Dear Editor…

If you have a spare text for a picture book, should you send along another copy of the story with illustration notes? If so, what’s the proper format for the notes? Brackets? Italics?

Sincerely,
Natasha

Stacy Innerst, today’s Guest Editor, is the award-winning illustrator of picture books including The Worm Family, M Is For Music, Levi Strauss Gets a Bright Idea, Lincoln Tells a Joke: How Laughter Saved the President (and the Country), and the upcoming The Beatles: They Were Fab and They Were Funny.

Dear Natasha…

An illustrator’s perspective: I prefer to have the opportunity to have an unencumbered first impression of the story, no matter how spare the text might be.  You’d be amazed at how easily an artist’s creative train can be derailed by having illustration notes, especially early in the process—it’s like a hair in your soup, you can’t forget about it.

The first reading of just words on a page, without preconceptions, is where the pictures start to germinate and the enthusiasm for the project takes hold. I can only assume that an editor would feel the same way.

I understand that with minimal text there is a temptation to sell the story by filling in the blanks, but I think if the root of the story is strong enough the pictures will come. A good illustrator will get what you’re trying to evoke without too much direction.

Best wishes to you,
Stacy Innerst

NEWSFLASH: “Free Full Picture Book Edit” Giveaway

Dear Readers…

The Editor believes writers should celebrate every milestone—and she’s got a milestone to celebrate with you. Her first picture book, Letters to Santa, has just published and she’s feting it by giving away a FREE edit of a picture book manuscript up to 2,000 words. Deadline: December 4, 2012. Read the full post for rules….

Dear Readers…

To celebrate the release of the Editor’s picture book Letters to Santa, marking the 100th anniversary of the USPS’s Letters to Santa program, the Editor is giving away a free edit* of one picture book manuscript. Scroll down using the blue sidebar on the right for all the rules:

1. Your manuscript must be a PICTURE BOOK MANUSCRIPT (target audience ages 3 to 8), text only.

2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE.

3. Your manuscript SHALL NOT EXCEED 2,000 WORDS.

4. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.

5. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, December 4, 2012, PST.

6. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on December 5, 2012, on DearEditor.com and on the DearEditor.com Facebook and Google+ pages, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Picture Book Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) *If you do not want your title announced, please use an alternate working title.*

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

*The edit may be a line-by-line “Line Edit” or a “Substantive Edit” in which the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, age appropriateness, and delivery of background information, as the Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Happy writing!

The Editor

News

Check here for the latest news about DearEditor.com…

June 25, 2025: Watch the Editor’s “State of the Children’s Book Market” Zoom Event

On June 26, 2025, The Editor, Deborah Halverson, will present a Zoom event called “The State of the Children’s Book Market” for SCBWI, the Society of Children’s Books Authors and Illustrators. The online event is 90 minutes long and free to SCBWI Premium members. You can register on the SCBWI website: www.SCBWI.org. This up-to-the minute, comprehensive overview of the children’s publishing industry and marketplace includes insights into market needs and acquisition trends, the launch and closure of various imprints, the influences of AI, challenges surrounding book banning, and the current landscape of the middle grade market.

April 27, 2025: Get Revision Tips from The Editor 

Join The Editor, Deborah Halverson, for her digital workshop “Novel & Picture Book Revision: 5 Ways to Translate ‘No’ to ‘Yes!'” hosted by SCBWI’s Southern California Chapter. Tired of rejections from agents and publishers? Even MORE tired of not understand WHY they rejected your manuscript? Learn five reasons that commonly appear in rejection letters for novels and picture books, translated and then followed by solutions for addressing the problem.

April 19, 2025: Writing for Teens or Tweens? The Editor’s Virtual Workshop Is For You

Whether your narrator is your young main character or an all-knowing omniscient being, there are ways to convince young readers that you understand them and their view of the world—and to hook’em good and hard in the process. Join The Editor, Deborah Halverson, for her technique-packed virtual workshop “Writing for Teens or Tweens? Then Think Like One: Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Sensibility in MG/YA Fiction.” This session teaches techniques for creating a narrative sensibility and voice that reflects the way teens and tweens think, resulting in novels that “click” with young readers. Register at www.cbw-laorg.

Meet the Editor at the Big Sur Children’s Writers Workshop in February 2025

Meet The Editor, Deborah Halverson, at the Big Sur Children’s Writers Workshop on February 21-23, 2025, in Monterey, California. Hosted by Andrea Brown Literary Agency, this workshop focuses on children’s literature, from picture books to young adult, and is designed for serious writers whose work is nearly ready for publication. Participants will engage in critique groups, panel discussions with industry professionals, and have opportunities for one-on-one feedback.

Nov 2, 2025: Join The Editor and Others for a Full Day of Writing Craft How-To’s

Join The Editor, Deborah Halverson, and fellow authors of writing craft books Mary Kole and Kirsten W. Larson for SCBWI’s “Crash Course on Craft” Nov 2 on Zoom. We’ll cover picture books, middle grade, and YA. All sessions recorded for later viewing. BONUS: 3 randomly selected participants will get a free critique. Info: https://www.scbwi.org/events/crash-course-in-craft. It’s a full day of craft talk from the authors of preeminent books on writing craft.

Feb 10, 2024: SCBWI-Los Angeles Writer’s Day March 9

On March 9, The Editor, Deborah Halverson, will present “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting Your Novel to Editors” at the SCBWI Los Angeles chapter’s Writers Day, to be held the Skirball Cultural Center in L.A. There will be opportunities to pitch your book to one of five children’s lit agents, a manuscript contest, networking and socializing with other writers, and  more sessions and keynotes. About “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting Your Novel to Editors“: Too often, YA/MG manuscripts are submitted to editors before the manuscripts are truly ready. Since you only get one chance with a particular editor, you can’t risk sending out a manuscript that’s not the best it can be. How can you know when your manuscript is really ready? Learn ten actionable tests for knowing when a novel is really, truly ready to submit . . . along with ways to whip the manuscript into shape if it fails a single one of them. For more info, visit Writers Day 2024: Bud to Blossom – How to Grow Stories and Nurture Creative Inspiration

Feb 9, 2024: The Editor at Big Sur Children’s Writers Workshop

The Editor, Deborah Halverson, is honored to be on the faculty of this year’s Big Sur Children’s Writers Workshop. Hosted by Andrea Brown Literary Agency, this three-day workshop “brings top tier professionals together with both beginner and seasoned writers.” Writers mingle and discuss their works with editors, agents, and published authors and attend small group sessions where one-on-one feedback is provided. Learn more at Big Sur Children’s Writers Workshop.

Oct 14, 2023: Publishers Weekly Reports on The Editor’s “State of the Children’s Publishing Market” Digital Event

This week, Publishers Weekly, the trade magazine for the publishing industry, gave rich coverage to The Editor’s digital event for SCBWI, “The State of the Children’s Publishing Market.” Its article, entitled “SCBWI Scopes Out Book Trends,” has been called a “must-read” across social media.

Sept 25, 2023: Watch the Editor’s State of the Children’s Book Industry & Market Report

On September 28, the Editor will be presenting a Digital Special Event for Premium members of SCBWI, the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators. In this state-of-the-market and acquisition trends presentation, titled “State of the Children’s Publishing Market,” the Editor will cover what’s selling and what’s being acquired, what’s being wished for and what’s showing signs of potential upswing, and factors influencing our industry’s health and sales, including AI, book banning, social media and book discovery, diversity efforts, the sale of Simon & Schuster, imprint launches and closures, and more. With a rich understanding of their unique corner of publishing, children’s book creators can strongly position the projects they’re working on—the ones that reflect them as individual storytellers. Learn more at SCBWI.org.

May 1, 2023: Join The Editor for May 13th On-Line Picture Book Workshop

Join The Editor on May 13, 2023, for a virtual three-hour workshop “Kit and Caboodle: Crafting Irresistible Picture Books From Idea to Query,” hosted by the writing group Children’s Book Writers of Los Angeles. Learn the features of irresistible picture books and strong query letters and elevator pitches. Attendees will put pen-to-paper during the workshop, applying the learned techniques to their work-in-progress picture book manuscript(s) or to brainstorm a new project, and crafting a pitch and query letter. Current WIPs NOT required for attendance. For details and sign-up, visit the event page.

April 29, 2023: The Editor on SCBWI Podcast

The Editor enjoyed a great conversation with SCBWI Podcast host Theo Baker in the episode “From Slush Pile to Stand Out Manuscript with Deborah Halverson.” They got into the nitty-gritty of her editorial approach, the challenges and joys of writing, and her journey in publishing. Listen on your favorite podcast app, including these (click to listen): Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Amazon Podcasts.

September 14, 2022: The Editor Is Featured in Writers’ Forum Magazine

The Editor is honored to be invited to present to the Redwood Writers chapter meeting on September 17, 2022. The online event, “You’ve Written a Book, What’s Next?”, will be an hour-long webinar for beginners as well as advanced writers — published and pre-published — looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. The Redwood Writers is the largest branch of the California Writers Club.

August, 2022: The Editor Is Featured in Writers’ Forum Magazine

The Editor was honored to be Writers’ Forum magazine’s “Where I Write” feature this month. The feature focused on her writing (and editing!) visits to the San Diego Public Library’s public reading room, which is a gorgeous space. Her default writing spaces are the lake and fields by her home, but at least two days each week she picks a beautiful San Diego location like Balboa Park or the beach at the famous Hotel Del Coronado. She  chooses her locations sometimes by mood, but usually with some thematic link to what she’s writing or editing that day, then she shares photos on her social media to share the inspiration of the space. “Just give me a travel mug of hot cocoa, a beautiful space, and an engrossing project to write or edit and I’m happy.”

August 14, 2022: The Editor Talks Trends in Children’s Books with SCBWI Nebraska

The Editor spent an afternoon at a virtual meeting of SCBWI Nebraska. She talked about how the various categories of children’s books are performing, how some audience and market expectations are changing while others remain constant, and what trends seem to be playing out in the market and in acquisitions and in reader reception. Always wonderful to talk books with book folk.

June 2, 2022: The Editor Interviewed in “How Writers Write” Podcast

“How Writers Write” podcast host Host Brian Murphy and The Editor (aka Deborah Halverson) discuss what makes fiction “Young Adult Fiction,”  writing practice and process, and what it’s like to think like an editor. It’s a fabulous discussion — they dig deep into it! To listen to the podcast: Apple: https://apple.co/3m9kAhZ; Spotify: https://spoti.fi/3m8rpQR1.

December 6, 2021: The Editor Auctioning Picture Book Edit & Call for #WeNeedDiverseBooks Holiday Auction

The Editor is honored to be contributing to the #WeNeedDiverseBooks Campaign by offering a picture book edit and phone call with me in their Holiday Auction. Visit https://bit.ly/3HZPItU to bid on this and check out all the other offerings. The Holiday Auction ends 10pm Eastern 12/6/21.

October 1, 2021: Spend the Weekend with The Editor and SCBWI-SoCal Los Angeles for Writer’s Retreat 2021

Join The Editor, 2 agents, and 2 editors for a 2-day Virtual Writer’s Retreat for creatures of chapter books and middle grade/young adult fiction October 9-10, 2021. Between critique sessions with agents and editors, Deborah will do Craft Workshops on four story elements — character, plot, setting, and voice… plus revision techniques! bit.ly/3lz4Q7i

September 1, 2021: The Editor To Share How to Find the Right Editor for Your Book

Join The Editor on Sept 11, 2021, for an inspiring and informative market report and learn about new imprints and what they are requiring. She will also share her tips on researching editors to find the perfect fit for your book. Register at www.sandiego.scbwi.org.

August 22, 2021: The Editor Featured in Publishers Weekly!

Publishers Weekly covered The Editor in their article “2021 SCBWI Conference: Significant Market Transformation Due to COVID-19.” The article provides a peek into Deborah’s Market Report for the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators summer conference. http://pwne.ws/3lwpczD.

September 1, 2021: The Editor to Share How to Find the Right Editor for Your Book

Join The Editor on Sept 11, 2021, for an inspiring and informative market report and learn about new imprints and what they are requiring. She will also share her tips on researching editors to find the perfect fit for your book. Register at www.sandiego.scbwi.org.

August, 2021: The Editor at UCLA’s Writers Symposium

The Editor joined 11 amazing YA authors at UCLA’s writing symposium “The Young and the Reckless: Writing for Teens. She was in the a panel with award-winning, best-selling YA novelists Aiden Thomas and Adam Sass. “Put characters in unexpected settings to provoke surprising dialogue, unpredictable action, and stress.”-Deborah Halverson https://www.uclaextension.edu/ya-symposium

April 31, 2021: The Editor Teaches Submissions Strategies Twice in April

The Editor taught children’s book wrters and illustrators the ins and outs of submitting their manuscripts to agents and publishers twice this month. First for Children’s Books Writers of Los Angeles (CBW-LA), and then for SCBWI’s South and Central Ohio chapter. The session was called “SUBMISSION STUDIO: Writing Queries, Strategizing Submissions, and Ten Ways to Translate “No” to “Yes!”

January 15, 2021: The Editor’s Predictions for the 2021 Children’s Lit Market are Published in SCBWI INSIGHT

The Editor shared some predictions for children’s literature market in the January edition of SCBWI INSIGHT, a monthly enewsletter for members of the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators. INSIGHT features current children’s book hot topics, helpful hints, exclusive interviews and monthly contests. When talking about likelihoods for 2021, emerging trend-lines are intriguing to extend forward. The Editor appreciated the challenge and opportunity to do so. For an excerpt of the members-only article “What Will the Children’s Literature Market Look Like in 2021?: A Crystal Ball Prediction,” click here.

November 24, 2020: The Editor Edits a Book Benefitting Victims of Domestic Violence & Abuse

The Editor was honored to edit the Purple Projects picture book PENNY’S ADVENTURES IN SAN DIEGO. Sales benefit victims of domestic violence and abuse. For this book, thirteen San Diego County mayors and a deputy mayor each penned a chapter of a story about a kind-hearted purple butterfly named Penny visiting their respective cities and doing a good deed. Per the San Diego Union-Tribune,  “Deborah Halverson, an editor and publishing consultant, wrote chapter transitions and edited the book at no cost, while Danielle Ramirez created colorful illustrations…. The 85-page illustrated book, “Penny’s Adventure in San Diego,” is now available for pre-order for $25 and due for release in early December.”

October, 2020: The Editor Offering New Class for KidLit Writers

The Editor is honored to be offering a new class for Children’s Book Insider: “10 Things That Get Kidlit Manuscripts Rejected – and How to Avoid Them.” It will be 90 minutes of deep-digging writing tools for writers of picture books, chapter books, middle grade and young adult — fiction and nonfiction. The class will be live online Tuesday, Oct 13, 2020, with lifetime on-demand rewatching. Jump on over to the class page for the full details and sign-up. Children’s Book Insider is a place to take classes on all aspects of writing and publishing books for young readers.

May 29, 2020: The Editor to Offer a Digital Workshop for SCBWI (Free & Exclusive to SCBWI Members)

The Editor will present the fifth workshop in the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators‘s second Digital Workshops series. The series is for current SCBWI members, and is free — an offering for members during this unusual summer of lockdown and creative challenge. The Editor’s workshop will be “Submissions Studio: Writing Queries, Strategizing Submissions, and 10 Ways to Translate ‘No’ to ‘Yes!’” It’s for writers of all children’s book categories — beginners as well as advanced writers — looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. The workshop will include a master handout, sample query letters, and a quick-reference sheet for translating editorial feedback. Workshop date:  Thursday, July 2 , 2020, 1:00pm-2:00pm, Pacific Daylight Time. Registration opens Monday, June 29 , 2020, 10am PDT.

March 2, 2020: The Editor’s Article about E-Book Lending in SCBWI’s “Insight”

The Editor’s article “The E-Book Lending Battle Between Libraries and Macmillan, and What It Means to Authors” has been published in the March 2020 issue of  INSIGHT, the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrator‘s monthly enewsletter featuring current children’s book hot topics, helpful hints, exclusive interviews and monthly contests.

Feb 7, 2020: The Editor’s Children’s Book Publishing Overview Article in SCBWI’s “The Bulletin”

The Editor’s article “2019: A Year in Review” has been published in SCBWI’s Winter 2020 edition of THE BULLETIN, a biannual publication provided to members of the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators. The article is a children’s publishing industry overview, examining events and trends of 2019.

Jan 6, 2020:  The Editor to Ring in the New Decade with a Submissions Webinar

The Editor is excited to be asked by SCBWI – Texas: Austin to ring in the new year with a  submissions webinar. WRITING QUERIES, STRATEGIZING SUBMISSIONS, & INTERPRETING EDITORIAL FEEDBACK is for writers of all children’s book categories, and beginners as well as advanced writers looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. Deborah will do some critiques as part of the webinar: query letters, 1st 10 pages of a YA/MG novel, or a submission package of a query letter, synopsis, and 1st 10 pages.  The webinar will be January 14, 2020, 7-8:30pm CT (5-6:30pmPT, 8-9:30pmET). Details and registration at bit.ly/2N5pXNV. 

Oct 29, 2019:  The Editor to Present a YA/MG  Technique-Focused Webinar
J
oin The Editor for a technique-focused, hour-long Webinar designed to make YA/MG writers stronger self-editors and novelists on Nov 14, 2019.  THE ULTIMATE CHECKLIST FOR SUBMITTING YOUR MG/YA TO EDITORS: 10 Tests Your Manuscript Must Pass to Prove It’s Ready to Submit. “How can you know when your Middle Grade/Young Adult manuscript is ready to submit to agents or editors? You think it is, but how can you know for sure? Learn ten actionable tests for knowing when a novel is really, truly ready to submit . . . along with ways to whip the manuscript into shape if it fails a single one of them.” Hosted by SCBWI-Texas: Southwest.  Details and registration at  http://bit.ly/2pnztn1 

Sept 3, 2019: Interview with the Editor and Giveaway
The fabulous resource website for teen writers TipsForTeenAuthors.com is GIVING AWAY a signed copy of The Editor’s writing craft book WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES to go with her in-depth interview about freelance editing as a career. You can read the interview and enter the giveaway at bit.ly/2lxDbrV.

June 15, 2019: The Editor to Teach YA/MG Webinar July 16, 2019
On July 16, 2019, 7-8:30pm CT (5-6:30pm PT / 8-9:30pm ET), Deborah will present the webinar Subtext & Subplots: How to Deepen and Energize Your YA/MG Fiction.” She’ll teach techniques for using subtext and subplots to build rich, satisfying stories and fix common storytelling “problems.” She’ll also be critiquing for those who choose that additional item for the event. It will bosted by SCBWI-Texas: Austin. Details & registration at bit.ly/2ZgH2bs.

June 10, 2019: The Editor Teaches YA all day at SCBWI-Florida’s Orlando Mid-Year Workshop June 7-8, 2019
The Editor was honored to be in Orlando presenting a full-day YA workshop with editor Hannah Milton of Little, Brown Books for Young Readers and author/agent Eric Smith of P. S. Literary. The workshop had additional tracks for middle grade fiction, picture books, and illustration, plus full-day intensives and one-on-one critiques.

April 1, 2019: The Editor to Critique and Consult at SCBWI-Nebraska’s Writing Retreat Sept 27-29 2019
The Editor will be meeting with attendees and critiquing manuscripts for this wonderful weekend of writing and industry talk in beautiful Mahoney State Park. Cabins, a stunning park, and book talk–SCBWI’s Nebraska chapter is putting on an inspiring, supportive event for writers of picture books and middle grade/young adult fiction.

March 2, 2019: The Editor Celebrates Read Across America Day with 4th Graders
2019’s Read Across America Day was a blast for kids and their readers across the country. The Editor
read to two 4th-grade classes at a local elementary school as part of that school’s celebration. In fact, she was doubly honored: Not only was she asked to read to them that special day, the kids asked her to read one of her works-in-progress. Huzzah!

February 20, 2019: The Editor to Be a Guest Reader for NEA’s Read Across America Day 2019
On Saturday, March 2, 2019, schools, libraries, and communities across America will celebrate literacy with the National Education Association’s Read Across America Day. The Editor will be an honored Guest Reader at an elementary school in San Diego the Friday before.

October 18, 2018: The Editor Guest Posts a Character Development Tip at Cynsations Blog
The Editor is honored to be a Guest Blogger on the amazing Cynsations blog today, with her post “Deborah Halverson on Viewing Narrative Beats as ‘Revelatory’ Beats in MG/YA Fiction.” A snippet: “Perhaps we writers drop in those generic actions because we’re so focused on getting the first scenes in place; perhaps we’re just not seeing those beats for the opportunities they are. ‘Oh, what treasure troves those little actions can be!'”

October 14, 2018: New Look for DearEditor.com
The Editor and her website designer have been hard at work all summer, and today they unveil the fruits of labor: a fresh new look for DearEditor.com. To celebrate, The Editor is giving away a free edit of a picture book manuscript and a free partial edit of a novel manuscript via Rafflecopter — the giveaway entry deadline is October 22, 2018. 

September 8, 2018: The Editor Spoke at SCBWI-San Diego about the State of the Children’s Book Industry
In an hour-long up-to-the-minute report, The Editor shared insights and information about the state of the children’s book industry with the members and guests of the San Diego chapter of the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators. 

April 3, 2018: The Editor on Faculty at SCBWI Southern Breeze WIK ’18
The Editor will present two sessions at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators‘ Annual Summer Conference in L.A. August 3-6, 2018:

  • “Up-to-the-Minute Market Report: Industry Updates, Submissions, and New Imprints”
  • “Subplots & Subtext: How to Deepen and Energize Your MG/YA Fiction”

She’ll also critique manuscripts one-on-one. Conference registration opens April 17th @10am PT. Manuscript Consults are limited so if you’re interested, register asap on the 17th.

March 12, 2018: The Editor on Faculty at SCBWI Southern Breeze WIK ’18
The Editor was honored be a part of the faculty at SCBWI-Southern Breeze’s 2018 writing-and-illustrating for kids (WIK) conference, presenting sessions on non-rhyming picture books, revising young-adult and middle-grade novels for submission, and the state of the children’s book industry. The Southern Breeze chapter of the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators offers support to writers and illustrators in Alabama, Georgia, and the Florida panhandle. It’s an amazing group of creative and supportive people, attendees and conference organizers alike. If you live in that area and write/illustrate for young people, do yourself a solid and check out the group.  

September 23, 2017: The Editor Interview in New MG/YA Online Writing Course at Children’s Book Insider
The Editor is proud to contribute an interview called “Writing for Tweens, Teens and New Adults” to Children’s Book Insider’s Blueprint series, for their new Middle Grade/Young Adult Writing Blueprint. CBI always presents great content. Other fabulous interviews are a part of the new Blueprint — editor Mary Kole and author Matthew J. Kirby. Author Alice Kuipers is the instructor. You can check it out at writing blueprints.com

March 22, 2017: The Editor in Faculty at SCBWI 46th Annual Summer Conference July 7-10, 2017
The Editor is excited to present the annual Market Survey as well as a 3-hr writing intensive “How to Talk Like a Teen When You’re So Not One: Writing Dialogue in YA/MG Fiction” at SCBWI’s 46th Annual Summer Conference in LA. She will also be doing one-on-one critiques throughout the conference.

Expand your skills regarding Craft, Storytelling, Character, Genre Studies, Getting an Agent, Getting Published and Revision. The Editor’s sessions: “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Authentic Dialogue for Young Adult Fiction,” “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction”, and “Panel: Connecting With Middle-Grade and Young Adult Readers.”

Sept 28, 2016: Join The Editor at Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conf Oct 28-30, 2016
Please join The Editor at Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference October 28-30 in LA. Expand your skills regarding Craft, Storytelling, Character, Genre Studies, Getting an Agent, Getting Published and Revision. The Editor’s sessions: “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Authentic Dialogue for Young Adult Fiction,” “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction”, and “Panel: Connecting With Middle-Grade and Young Adult Readers.”

June 8, 2016: The Editor on YA Author Panel June 11 at Barnes & Noble in Santee, CA
The Editor will be a part of a YA author panel at Santee, California, Barnes & Nobel Saturday, June 11, at 2pm. The panel is “Writing a Book Is Like Riding a Roller Coaster!” Fellow panelists—fabulous YA writers—and The Editor will share stories of our writing ups and downs, and answer questions about writing and publishing: Debra Driza (MILO 2.0 series), Barrie Summy (I SO DON’T DO series and THE DISAPPEARANCE OF EMILY H.), Karri Thompson (MIRROR X, ASCENDENCY), and Matthew Ward (THE FANTASTIC FAMILY WHIPPLE, THE WAR OF THE WORLD RECORDS). Come join them!

May 30, 2016: The Editor Contributes “Believable Dialogue” Chapter to New Writer’s Digest Book 
The Editor is proud to have contributed Chapter 10 “Believable Dialogue” to Writer’s Digest’s new book CRAFTING DYNAMIC DIALOGUE, a comprehensive guide to writing compelling, authentic dialogue in fiction. The craft book is filled with advice and instruction from best-selling authors and instructors like Deborah Halverson (The Editor), Nancy Kress, Elizabeth Sims, Steven James, James Scott Bell, Donald Maass, Cheryl St. John, and many others. Covered in the book: bend the rules to create a specific effect; understand the role of dialogue in reader engagement; use dialect and jargon effectively; give every character a believable, unique voice; set the pace and tone; reveal specific character background details; generate tension and suspense; and utilize internal dialogue.

May 3, 2016: Join the Editor at SCBWI 2016 Summer Conference
Join The Editor at the SCBWI 2016 Summer Conference in Los Angeles July 29-31 (optional craft intensive a on Aug 1). She’ll be presenting the breakout “Crafting Swoon-Worthy Young Adult Romantic Relationships”, the “An Up-to-the-Minute Market Report” on the main stage, and the craft intensive “Crafting Plots that Push, Pull, and Provoke Characters… and Readers, Too.” She will also do 1-on-1 critiques.

August 26, 2015: Rave Review of WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES on SCBWI Blog
Author/blogger Lee Wind is well known for caring deeply about writers, so his recommendation of WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES on the SCBWI blog makes The Editor especially proud: “Deborah Halverson (who I’m always so impressed with) has put together a really useful guide… Her book is packed with good stuff.”

August 10, 2015: The Editor’s WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION wins San Diego Book Award
The Editor’s book WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION won the San Diego Book Award for 2014 Best Published Business Book. To celebrate, she is giving away a Free Full Manuscript Edit on DearEditor.com August 10, 2015 – August 14, 2015, with the winner to be announced on DearEditor.com August 15, 2015. Click over to the DearEditor.com announcement post for entry details.

April 3, 2015: The Editor to Present Market Report at SCBWI Annual Conference
The Editor will be at the 44th Annual SCBWI Summer Conference in Los Angeles July 31- August 2.  She’ll be presenting the “Up to the Minute Market Report,” the breakout sessions “Techniques in New Adult Fiction for YA Writers” and “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting Your MG/YA Novel to Editors,” the 3-hr intensive “Voice in MG/YA: How To Create an Authentic Teen Narrator,” and critiques. Registration opens April 9. For more info: http://www.scbwi.org/2015-summer-conference-in-los-angeles/

April 1, 2015: The Editor to Talk NA Fiction with Librarians
The Editor is looking forward to talking about New Adult fiction and its distinct traits and marketplace at the Mid America Library Alliance’s Workshop on New Adult Fiction on April 28. Librarians looking to be as informed as possible for the sake of their patrons. Love it!

Feb 12, 2015: The Editor Interviewed on Adventures in YA Publishing Blog
The Editor is honored to be featured on the fabulous blog Adventures in YA Publishing this week. The blog covers Young Adult Fiction in general, gives away YA books (several giveaways going on this week!), features advice from YA authors, and shares writing tips, and publishing information. Here’s an excerpt from the interview: “With the current enthusiasm for contemporary realistic stories, I see too many manuscripts that showcase above-average writing but fail to deliver a fresh angle on the contemporary teen experience. What makes your story about a regular kid in high school stand out from all those other well written stories about regular kids in high schools? I want to see more great writers find their distinct angles so that they can find publishers and places on bookstore shelves.

Jan 15, 2015: The Editor to Lead Simi Valley Writing Retreat January 16-18
The Editor is leading a fun and informative three-day intensive for SCBWI Cen-Cal Writers’ Retreat: An Editor’s Strategies for Reaching Fabulous Final Drafts. This intensive will consist of lectures, hands-on exercises, informal discussions, and the option of a small group critique session. For an additional fee, you can register for a manuscript critique and private consultation with The Editor.

Oct 8, 2014: Blog Tour and Tourwide Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway
The blog tour celebrating the publication of Writing New Adult Fiction is under way! From October 6 – 31, bloggers will be posting reviews of the book, interviews with The Editor, and guest blog posts written by The Editor covering craft, promotion, and the business of publishing New Adult fiction. All of the posts have giveaways, and there’s a tourwide giveaway of a free full manuscript edit. Here’s the link for the tour schedule, updated with excerpts and direct links as each post goes live: https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6644 And here’s the link for the free manuscript edit giveaway’s Rafflecopter entry form: http://www.rafflecopter.com/rafl/display/5440a354204/.

Oct 3, 2014: Be a Writing New Adult Fiction Blog Tour Host
The Editor is honored to be featured at literary agent Jill Corcoran’s blog, discussing what makes NA different from YA fiction: ““What’s the difference between ‘new’ adult and ‘young’ adult? My answer usually starts with a single word: sensibility.” Plus, Jill is running a contest for the feature, the winner of a signed copy of WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION being chosen by October 15, 2014.

Sept 17, 2014: Be a Writing New Adult Fiction Blog Tour Host
Want to be a host on The Editor’s WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION blog tour, featuring reviews, author interviews, spotlights, guest posts, and giveaways? The tour runs Oct 6-31. Sign up: http://bit.ly/1v19GIK

Sept 15, 2014: Interview with The Editor and Signed Book Giveaway on KC Maguire’s Blog
Stop by KC Maguire’s blog for an interview with The Editor and to enter the giveaway for a free signed copy of The Editor’s new book WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION. From the interview: “NA has become established and is pushing for a greater range of stories and thematic exploration, there seems to be a call for fiction that doesn’t necessarily get into the nitty gritty of body parts and movements. After all, not everyone who wants to read about the NA experience wants such graphic detail, and not every writer is comfortable writing it. Ultimately, the details of the sex acts aren’t necessary in order to explore love at this stage of life. Serve up emotionally satisfying relationships. Craft stories that build up sexual anticipation through love denied, teased, and toyed with. A much-anticipated kiss can be more dramatically powerful than a perfunctory graphic groping. That’s why I dedicate a full chapter of my book to the crafting believable, satisfying romance. And it’s why I say that explicit sex scenes are currently expected but maybe not so essential in the long run. The degree of explicitness in NA fiction is an evolving element.”

Sept 2, 2014: The Editor Joins Faculty of  SCBWI-Missouri Fall Conference Sept 6-7, 2014
The Editor will present the “State of the Market” and lead the intensive “How to Build Your Own Teenager” at the SCBWI-Missouri Fall Conference in St. Charles, Missouri, September 6-7, 2014.

Sept 2, 2014: The Editor’s Article “NA Fiction for the YA Writer” in Sept/Oct Issue of SCBWI’s The Bulletin
“Writers see an overlap between ‘mature YA’ and NA and wonder what it means for their own stories about older teens…. There are essential differences in story content, though, and knowing those can help you determine if your mature YA is actually an NA offering.” From The Editor’s article in the Sept/Oct issue of SCBWI’s THE BULLETIN. If you’re an SCBWI member and want to read it, log into your profile page and click on resource library, then on Bulletin in the dropdown menu.

July 1, 2014: The Editor to Join Faculty of  Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference Aug 15-17, 2014
Join The Editor for her 3-hour Boot Camp “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction” and her 1-hour breakout session “How to Hide the Seams for Smooth, Flowing Fiction” at the Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference at the Hyatt Regency Century Plaza – Los Angeles August 15-17. For details about the sessions and other award-winning, bestselling authors and publishing professionals at the Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference, click here.

May 12, 2014: The Editor’s Interview about the SCBWI Conference, Uses for Setting, and the Difference Between NA and YA Fiction
“Saying NA fiction is just YA with sex is akin to saying YA fiction is just stories of high school romance.” Insightful interviewer Lee Wind asks The Editor about being on the faculty of SCBWI’s upcoming summer conference in Los Angeles (Aug 1-4) and also about the difference between “voice” and “sensibility” in writing, characteristics of New Adult Fiction, and other writing advice. Check out the full interview here.

April 18, 2014: The Editor Presenting Market Keynote at SCBWI 43rd Annual Summer Conference in Los Angeles, Aug 1 – 4
Join the Editor and other authors, agents, and publishing professionals at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators annual info-packed 4-day summer conference. In addition to presenting the market keynote, the Editor will present the session “New Adult Fiction for the Young Adult Writer” and the intensive “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Sensibility in MG/YA Fiction.” She’s also available for one-on-one critiques. Join the fun! Registration opens Monday, April 21, 10am PST. Intensives fill up FAST.

December 6, 2013: Meet the Editor at the New Adult Sleepover Weekend in Savannah, GA, December 6 – 8
Check out the inaugural New Adult Sleepover Weekend, an event for readers and authors of New Adult fiction. Panels about NA characters and publishing, swag, meet-and-greets, parties . . . a fun and informative weekend! The Editor will be there, meeting and greeting and taking in all things NA. Savannah Riverfront Marriott, 100 General McIntosh Boulevard, Savannah, GA 31401.

November 22, 2013: Meet the Editor on YA Panel at San Diego’s Mira Mesa B&N on November 22
As part of Barnes & Noble’s Discovery Friday event Friday, November 22, at 6pm, the Editor will be part of a lively panel about books for young people with Shannon Messenger, author of the middle grade series Keeper of the Lost Cities and the teen trilogy Let the Sky Fall, and Debra Driza, author of the YA thriller Mila 2.0, the first in a series currently being developed as a series for ABC. The panel will be moderated by fabulous Full Circle Literary agent Taylor Martindale. It’s Discovery Friday at the B&N that day, so there will be giveaways all day, including Catching Fire posters, John Green posters, Legos, etc. There will also be a special musical performance by Stacey Leathersich at 8:30. B&N: 10775 Westview Pkwy, San Diego, CA 92126.

August 22, 2013: The Editor Interview Delves Into How Writers Can Succeed in Publishing
In an interview by N.W. Harris, author of Joshua’s Tree, which currently tops the Goodreads 2013 Summer Reading list, The Editor talks about writing fiction versus nonfiction, her path to publication and editorial career, and three things new writers must do to compete in the current, highly competitive publishing industry: “Publishing is an industry, as unartful as it is to admit that, and writers who want their books out there for readers to buy must consider themselves players rather than pawns.” Full the full interview, visit NWHarrisBooks.

August 5, 2013: The Editor Presents State of the Market Keynote at SCBWI Summer Conference
Publishers Weekly included The Editor in its coverage of the 42nd Annual SCBWI Summer Conference: “Deborah Halverson, founder of DearEditor.com, delivered a keynote titled Market Report: An Up-to-the-Minute State of the Industry, which compiled the results of interviews with 17 publishing insiders…. Halverson reported that sales are up for picture books, but editors are still cautious about the category. Chapter books and early readers remain challenging….” For more highlights from The Editor’s keynote, click over to PW’s article.

May 7, 2013: The Editor to Pen ‘New Adult Fiction’ Craft Book
The Editor will publish Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction with Writer’s Digest Books in Fall 2014. Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction is a hands-on guide featuring essential information, steps, and techniques necessary to turn a clever concept into a top-notch novel for 18- to 26-year-olds as well as the teen and adult crossover audience. The book will include advice on self-publishing into the New Adult marketplace, insider tips for finding the right agent and/or editor and preparing a stand-out submission package for traditional publishers, and an extensive chapter on self-marketing to help writers move boldly into the realm of self-promotion.

April 20, 2013: The Editor to Deliver Keynote at SCBWI 42nd Summer Conference
The Editor will deliver the “Market Report: An Up-to-the-Minute State of the Industry” keynote at the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators 42nd Summer Conference in Los Angeles August 2 – 5, 2013. She will also teach an intensive called “How to Build Your Own Teenager: Techniques for Writing Believable MG/YA Characters, and two one-hour breakout sessions called “The Read-Aloud Factor: Achieving Rhythm without Relying on Rhyme in Picture Books” and “Setting, Wherefore Art Thou?: The Surprising Benefits and How-To’s of Setting in MG/YA Fiction.” For information about attending the conference, click over to the conference home page.

March 18, 2013: Susan Stevens Crummel Joins Revision Week Lineup
The Editor is thrilled to announce that award-winning picture book author Susan Stevens Crummel will be joining the Revision Week lineup! Loved for her solo books as well as her collaborations with author/illustrator (and sister!) Janet Stevens, Susan will shed light on the ins and outs of working through a highly collaborative revision process.

March 15, 2013: Announcing DearEditor.com’s Revision Week 2013, March 24-30
It’s almost time for DearEditor.com’s second annual Revision Week. March 24-30 The Editor will host five authors—who have published a combined 270 best-selling and award-winning books—for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches at DearEditor.com. Who’s stopping by? Bestselling and award-winning authors Laura Griffin (romance novels), Matthew J. Kirby (YA novels), Bruce Hale (chapter book series and picture books), Peter Economy (non-fiction), and Larry Dane Brimner (picture books, chapter books, easy readers, nonfiction… you name it!), that’s who! The Editor will add to the excitement with daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and a grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

Jan 26, 2013: OnText Blog Features DearEditor.com
DearEditor.com gets the thumbs up in the OnText blog feature “Writing Children’s or Young Reader Books? Great Source of Publishing Help.” OnText is hosted by ghostwriter Maryan Pelland. Pelland calls The Editor “a wealth of information for writers, authors, and ghostwriters to ask questions about the craft of writing or about the very confusing and frustrating publishing industry. Her answers are concise and pull-no-punches.”

Dec 1, 2012: The Editor Celebrates Her First Picture Book with a FREE EDIT Giveaway
The Editor believes writers should celebrate every milestone—and she’s got a milestone to celebrate with her readers. Her first picture book, Letters to Santa, has just published and she’s feting it by giving away a FREE edit of a picture book manuscript up to 2,000 words. Deadline: December 4, 2012. Read the giveaway post for full entry details.

Oct 17, 2012: The Editor Announces Three New Books
The Editor’s three books for Rubicon’s Remix struggling readers series have launched! Brave New World: Cyber World, Brave New World: Meltdown, and Brave New World: Robotic World. To page through previews of the books electronically, visit the Remix: Brave New World series page.

Sept 17, 2012: Finding Bliss Blog Hosts the The Editor, Holds Free Book Giveaway
Excerpt: “Revision can be daunting. . . . Why not give your brain a break by breaking your task into focused chunks? With this approach, you’d pick a writing element, say plot, and ignore everything but that. Working Big Picture chunks to small detail chunks rather than page by page, you’d focus not on revising the story but on honing single elements. Gone is that scattered, overwhelmed feeling.” Read the rest of The Editor’s guest post “Chunking Your Revision” on Laura Howard’s blog Finding Bliss, and enter her giveaway for a free copy of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies.

August 27, 2012: An Interview with The Editor
Excerpt: “The trick is to make something big happen in the story to create a big emotional impact that would raise the emotional temperature of the story and keep it from being too quiet.” You can the full interview with The Editor on Natasha Yim’s blog “I Must Be a Masochist – A Writer’s Life.”

August 23, 2012: Coverage of The Editor’s SCBWI conference Market Trends Keynote
The Editor complied the “2012 SCBWI Market Survey: Publishers of Books For Young Readers” report for the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators, and gave a keynote at the recent SCBWI Summer Conference about what she learned from her survey – giving attendees the current market needs and trends. To read coverage of her keynote, click over to “SCBWI Summer Conference: Market Keynote Follow-Up with Deborah Halverson” on the SCBWI Blog.

June 28, 2012: The Editor Advises How to Use Subtext as a tool on Quirk and Quill
The Editor’s advice about using subtext to puff up a “flat” fiction manuscript is featured today on Quirk and Quill, a blog hosted by 10 alumni of the Vermont College of Fine Arts writing program. To read the post, click over to “Serving Up Subtext” on Quirk and Quill.

May 25, 2012: The Editor Visits Stanford…Virtually
The Editor talked books and writing during an online chat session today with a Stanford writing class that uses her Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies as their text. The Editor is honored that schools continue to adopt the book for their classes.

Mar 23, 2012: Join The Editor at SCBWI National Conference in L.A. Aug 3-6
The Editor will be at SCBWI’s 2012 Summer Conference in Los Angeles Aug 3-6. She’ll be presenting the Current Market Report keynote, a breakout session on writing dialogue, an intensive on revising your MG/YA novel, and an intensive on creating youthful narrative sensibility. Registration starts April 18 at 10am. Check out the full info on the SCBWI conference page.

Mar 4, 2012: DearEditor.com’s Revision Week with 8 Bestselling, Award-Winning Authors
DearEditor.com brings together eight prolific, bestselling, award-winning authors for Revision Week, 7 days of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day:

  • Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger.
  • Kathleen Krull, author of more than 60 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers.
  • R.L. LaFevers, author of the 13 novels for young people.
  • Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, popular chapter book collaborators.
  • Mark A. Clements, horror/suspense author, screenwriter, and prolific ghostwriter.
  • Nathan Bransford, top blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books.
  • Rachel Caine, New York Times, USA Today, and internationally bestselling author of more than 30 novels.

Feb 26, 2012: DearEditor.com Now on Google+
DearEditor.com is pleased to announce the DearEditor.com Google+ page, sharing industry news, creative inspirations, and writing tips to keep you in the publishing know. The new page complements the DearEditor.com Facebook page and the @Dear_Editor Twitter feed.

Feb 26, 2012: DearEditor.com Goes Mobile
DearEditor.com is now mobile-friendly. With the new mobile design, you can easily read new posts and comments on your mobile device of choice, and you can post your own comments on-the-go. With a simple click on the arrow at the top of your mobile display, you can access archives, categories, and any page on the DearEditor.com website.

The Editor to appear on “Writers Voices” Radio Feb 17, 2012
The Editor will appear live on “Writers Voices” 1-2pm CST, Feb 17, 2012. “Writers Voices” airs on KRUU FM 100.1, an open source, solar-powered community radio station that broadcasts to the larger Fairfield, Iowa, area and has worldwide listenership via the web. Each week they air an hour-long interview with a writer, agent, editor, publisher, or someone else connected to the world of writing. To listen to the show live, tune in to KRUU FM radio or go to online at http://www.writersvoices.com. Hear the rebroadcast Monday Feb 20 8 AM on KRUU FM or download it from the archives: http://www.writersvoices.com or http://www.kruufm.com/station/archives/61.

Free Online Workshop with The Editor Feb 21-23, 2012
The Institute of Children’s Literature website is hosting an online YA workshop featuring The Editor. The drop-in Q&A-format workshop takes place on the ICL’s message board, which anyone can read (no registration required). If you want to post a question, you do need to register (for FREE) by sending email to jan.fields@forums.institutechildrenslit.com with the username you want. Check out the ICL’s Guest Speaker archives while you’re there.

Feb 7, 2012:The Editor on “How to Promote Your Book” Podcast
As part of her blog tour for her book How to Promote Your Children’s Books, author/illustrator Katie Davis focused her regular podcast on “Promoting Your Book.” The Editor has a guest appearance. See the episode description here: http://katiedavis.com/how-to-promote-your-book/. Or click here to hear it directly.

Feb 6, 2012:DearEditor.com to host How to Promote Your Children’s Book Blog Tour
Author/illustrator Katie Davis is a tireless promoter whose 9 children’s books have sold over 250,000 copies. On February 6, 2012, Katie shares what she’s learned about promoting books–and she’s giving away a free download of her new eBook How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller. Follow Katie’s full blog tour for more promo insights & giveaways:

Dec 4, 2011:YA Fusion blog Interviews The Editor
YA Fusion, a blog written by YA fiction writers about the amazing world of young adult fiction, interviewed The Editor and hosted a giveaway of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. The interviews spans the writing, editing, and reading realm, and offers tips to writers about gauging market trends and walking the line in “edgy” fiction. http://bit.ly/viGL8O

Oct 19, 2011:More Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut: An Interview with The Editor
Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut blog cointinues with an interview with The Editor, covering what makes YA fiction so popular, what aspiring writers should do, and what young readers should know: http://bit.ly/qEOyqs.

Oct 17, 2011:The Editor Featured During Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut
The Writing Nut blog features The Editor and her book Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies all week. Stop by for a review of the book, an interview with The Editor—aka Deborah Halverson—and a giveaway: http://bit.ly/r0l1Ht

Sept 25, 2011:San Diego Union-Tribune Dubs Writing YA Fiction For Dummies “Tremendously Helpful”
The San Diego Union-Tribune dubbed The Editor’s new Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies a Recommended Read, calling it, “Fun, insightful and tremendously helpful.”

Sept 24, 2011:The Editor Presenting at San Diego Public Library Book Festival Oct 1
The Editor is honored to be a part of the SAN DIEGO COUNTY LIBRARY BOOK FESTIVAL Saturday, Oct 1, at the Encinitas Library. Speakers include YA great Ellen Hopkins, bestseller Lisa See, and Skinny Bitch series author Kim Barnouin. The Editor will be presenting in the community room 5 to 6pm. Check out the festival website for a full list of great speakers.

Sept 24, 2011:The Editor Teaches YA at SCWC Conf in Newport Beach Sept 24
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be presenting “Writing for Teens? Then Think Like One” at the Southern California Writers’ Conference – LA on Sept 24, 2011. Here’s her session description: “Whether your narrator is your young main character or an all-knowing omniscient being, there are ways to convince young readers that you understand them and their view of the world—and to hook’em good and hard in the process. This session teaches techniques for creating a narrative sensibility that reflects the way teens think, resulting in teen fiction that “clicks” with young readers.” Click on over to the SCWC website for details about this conference, which runs Sept 23-25.

August 3, 2011: The Editor featured on Writing on the Sidewalk Blog
The Editor,aka Deborah Halverson, talks writing, Legos, and banging on drums in “Writing on the Sidewalk”, the blog of authors Suzanne Santillan and Sarah Wones Tomp.

August 3, 2011: The Editor on The League of Extraordinary Writers Blog
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, is an interview guest on The League of Extraordinary Writers, a blog hosted by dystopian authors Jeff Hirsch, Elana Johnson, Julia Karr, Beth Revis, and Angie Smibert. With Q-and-A about the most common pitfalls for writers, the current rise in YA lit, a list of must-reads for writers, and the viability of self-publishing as an alternative pub path for writers, this interview is full of great information. Check it out!

June 11, 2011: Announcing WYAFFD Blog Tour
Please drop in on this 8-stop blog tour celebrating the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. Interviews, guest blog posts on craft, promotion, and chapter books, and a grand finale free webinar. Full schedule:

July 18: Shrinking Violet Promotions
July 19: SCBWI Children’s Market blog
July 20: QueryTracker.net
July 21: Elizabeth O. Dulemba Blog
July 22: Cheryl Rainfield Blog
July 25: Story Connection
July 26: The Got Story Countdown
July 27: Free “Meet the Editor” webinar w/ Katie Davis

June 29, 2011: Interviews, Guest Blogs, Podcasts, & Giveaways in Support of the WYAFFD Virtual Book Launch
Visit these websites and blogs for exclusive content and giveaways in support of the Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummiea Virtual Book Launch from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com:

June 29, 2011: Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies Virtual Book Launch Begins!
Celebrate the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com with daily “Free First Chapter Critique” giveaways, free downloads, excerpts from the book, and profiles of the 13 amazing authors, editors, and agents who so generously contributed sidebars to the book. As the grand finale, The Editor is giving away a “Free Full Manuscript Edit” on the final day. Click here for details about the 7-Day Virtual Book Launch.

June 21, 2011: Announcing the Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies Virtual Book Launch
Celebrate the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com with daily “Free First Chapter Critique” giveaways, free downloads, excerpts from the book, and profiles of the 13 amazing authors, editors, and agents who so generously contributed sidebars to the book. As the grand finale, The Editor is giving away a “Free Full Manuscript Edit” on the final day. Click here for details about the 7-Day Virtual Book Launch.

June 20, 2011: Video Writing Tip from The Editor
Click over to Tina Nichols Coury’s blog Tales from the Rushmore Kid for a one-minute video tip from The Editor. The topic: Checking to see if your protagonist has completed a full character arc.

June 8, 2011: Free Webinar with The Editor July 27, 2011
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be conducting a free webinar with author Katie Davis on July 27, 2011, 9:00-10:oo pm EST. For details or to sign up, visit the webinar information page!

June 6, 2011: Writing YA Fiction for Dummies Virtual Book Launch June 29-July 5
DearEditor.com will be the site of a huge 7-day virtual book launch for the publication of The Editor’s new book WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES. Visit every day for exclusive free downloads, book excerpts, profiles of lauded MG/YA author contributors, and daily Free Critique/Full MS Edit Giveaways. More details to come!

June 6, 2011:The Editor to Critique at SCBWI-LA National Summer Conf.
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be critiquing manuscripts at the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators 40th Annual Summer Conference in Los Angeles, August 5-8, 2011. Click on over to SCBWI’s conference site for details about this incredible event.

May 16, 2011:The Editor Gives Setting Tips in Hunger Mountain
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, is honored to have an article featured in the summer 2011 issue of HUNGER MOUNTAIN, the Vermont College of Fine Arts’ wonderful journal of the arts. In “Where the Teens Are: 5 Ways to Freshen Up YA Fiction’s Favorite Settings,” Deborah offers writers tips for making familiar teen fiction settings like school and the main character’s room feel provocative instead of inevitable. Click on over to Hunger Mountain for more.

May 11, 2011:The Editor Featured in Anderson Valley Post
Anderson Valley Post, the local paper of Anderson Valley, California, ran an article featuring The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, and her co-faculty for the Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop. To read about Edgar Award-winning author Charlie Price, author/illustrator Dr. Mira Reisberg, and Deborah, click over to Anderson Valley Post. To learn more about the May 21, 2011, conference, go to the conference website.

April 11, 2011:Registration Now Open for Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop
Registration is open for the Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop, to be held May 21, 2011, in Cottonwood, CA (17 miles south of Redding, CA, and approx. 2 hours from Sacramento). The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be teaching at the event, which is dedicated to helping children’s book writers revise their young adult novels and picture books. The 1-day workshop is hosted by SCBWI‘s California North/Central chapter, with Edgar Mystery Award nominee author Charlie Price and award-winning picture book illustrator, art director, designer, and educator Dr. Mira Reisberg filling out the faculty. For more information or to register (deadline May 1, 2011), contact scbwicanorthcentral@gmail.com or go to the Conference website.

Mar 2, 2011:SCBWI Chapter Features The Editor in Kite Tales
The Editor (Deborah Halverson) lays down some scene advice in the 2011 Spring Issue of Kite Tales, the newsletter for the SCBWI Tri-Regions of Southern California. The chapter has shared a link to the newsletter, which is full of fantastic information: Kite Tales, Spring 2011. For more information about SCBWI (Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators), go to SCBWI.org.

Jan 26, 2011:The Editor to Talk to Teachers about Supporting Young Writers
June 20-23, 2011, teachers earning their MAs will gather at the 32nd San Diego State University Summer Conference, and The Editor (Deborah Halverson) will be there with them. Her session, “BIF! BAM! POW!: Helping Young Writers Release Their Inner Heroes,” focuses on helping young writers tap into the heroes within themselves in order to write about characters who overcome their fears and flaws for heroic outcomes.

Jan 25, 2011:The Editor at Cottonwood Revision Intensive
On May 21, 2011, The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be helping children’s book writers revise their young adult novels and picture books at the Cottonwood Revision Intensive in Cottonwood, California. The 2-day workshop is hosted by SCBWI‘s California North/Central chapter, with author Charlie Price filling out the faculty. For more information or to register, contact scbwicanorthcentral@gmail.com

Nov 29, 2010:The Editor Goes In Between Scenes for FictionNotes
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, wrote a guest post today about why it’s crucial that a writer knows what happens in the white space between scenes for author Darcy Pattison’s information-loaded blog “Fiction Notes.” Darcy is a writing teacher and the author of The Book Trailer Manual (www.booktrailermanual.com), several picture books, and the teen fantasy novel The Wayfinder.

Nov 29, 2010:Author Mary E. Pearson Becomes 1st Guest Editor for the Day
As DearEditor.com’s first Guest Editor for the Day, author Mary E. Pearson stepped in to help a frustrated writer battle back against writer’s block. Mary is the award-winning author of five novels for teens, including the new The Miles Between.

Nov 27, 2010:New Feature Added to DearEditor.com – Guest Editor for the Day
DearEditor.com is adding a new feature: Guest Editor for the Day. Starting Monday, November 29, The Editor will occasionally hand over her editorial pen to a publishing colleague who will field a question that falls within his or her realm of expertise. In this way The Editor hopes to add to the depth of the knowledge bandied about DearEditor.com. The more voices we hear, the wiser we become. First up: award-winning author Mary E. Pearson.

Nov 24, 2010:The Editor Answers Callers’ Questions on “Brain Burps About Books” Podcast
Deborah Halverson, aka The Editor, answered listeners’ questions about publishing children’s books on author Katie Davis‘s podcast Brain Burps About Books.” If you’ve got a question you’d like Deborah to answer in a follow-up podcast, call Katie’s toll free line at 888-522-1929 and leave a message.

Nov 11, 2010:One Week to Phone In Questions to The Editor
On November 18th, author Katie Davis will tape an interview with Deborah Halverson, aka The Editor, for Katie’s podcast “Brain Burps About Books.” If you’ve got a question you’d like Deborah to answer in the podcast, call Katie’s toll free line at 888-522-1929 by November 18th and leave a message. DearEditor.com will post an update when that podcast is available for listening.

Oct 11, 2010:Six-Month Free Picture Book Edit Giveaway Winner Announced
Congratulations to Jennifer Carson, the winner of the FREE EDIT giveaway celebrating DearEditor.com’s first six months. Jennifer’s manuscript is entitled Stinking Beauty. To the rest of DearEditor.com’s readers, thanks for a fun first half year. Keep those questions, comments, and anecdotes coming! The more we hear, the more we learn.

Sept 20, 2010:GIVEAWAY! a FREE EDIT of one Picture Book Manuscript
The Editor is giving away a FREE EDIT of one picture book manuscript to celebrate the six-month anniversary of DearEditor.com. To enter more than once, spread the word! See the DearEditor.com giveaway announcement for rules and to enter. Deadline: October 10, 2010.

July 29, 2010: The Editor to Write “Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies”
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, has signed on to write “Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies” for Wiley Publishers’ For Dummies… line, to hit stores June 2011. To learn more about the For Dummies… books, go to www.ForDummies.com.

June 18, 2010: The Editor Guest Posts about Setting in Novels on “Cynsations”The Editor, Deborah Halverson, wrote a guest post today about setting in novels on author Cynthia Leitich Smith’s fabulous blog “Cynsations.” Cynthia is a New York Times and Publishers Weekly best-selling author of YA Gothic fantasies, including Tantalize and Eternal, as well as several picture books for children. Here’s a teaser from Deborah’s guest post, “Setting, Wherefore Art Thou?“: “We need setting in our stories. We need the richness that makes up setting, the sensual engagement that can only come from hearing the crunch of frosty grass under the protagonist’s bare feet, or feeling the sudden whispery kiss of a spider’s web dangling from the eaves. We’d just have a girl walking across a lawn and a creepy old house. Where’s the joy in that?” Check out Cynthia’s blog for the whole post. To learn more about Cynthia, go to CynthiaLeitichSmith.com.

May 31, 2010: The Editor’s Article about Teen Fiction & Melodrama Appears in “The Inside Story

The Editor, Deborah Halverson, wrote the feature article “Melodrama Isn’t a Four-Letter Word” for this month’s “The Inside Story”, a monthly newsletter by Bruce Hale, author of two hilarious chapter book series—the Chet Gecko series, and the Underwhere series. Here’s a teaser from Deborah’s article: “So, you’re thirty-something writing a teen novel, and you want your narrative voice to sound convincingly youthful? That’s an outstanding goal. A believable voice makes all the difference in the success of a manuscript. But how do you actually do it? The answer might surprise you.” To subscribe to “The Inside Story” and read Deborah’s full article, go to http://bit.ly/b3yXd5. To learn more about Bruce Hale, go to BruceHale.com.

May 25, 2010: The Editor Interviewed for SCBWI’s “Industry PROfiles
The Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators has just posted an on-line interview with DearEditor.com’s resident Editor, Deborah Halverson. The interview focuses on Deborah’s literary journey from playroom to publishing house to author’s chair, and explores how she balances her roles as Author/Editor/Mom. The full interview appears in SCBWI’s “Industry PROfiles.”

May 3, 2010: The Editor to Speak at SCBWI-San Diego Chapter Meeting
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, will present “How Do You Know Your Manuscript Is Ready for Submission?” at the season-opening meeting of the SCBWI-San Diego chapter, on September 11, 2010, from 2-4pm, in Hahn Nursing Hall on the University of San Diego campus. For details about the meeting and the chapter, visit their website.

April 15, 2010: One-Month Anniversary Edit Giveaway Winner Announced
Congratulations to Annemarie O’Brien, winner of the giveaway of a free substantive edit of a YA/MG manuscript. Annemarie’s manuscript is an upper middle grade novel titled Dance with Borzois. Congratulations, Annemarie! To the rest of DearEditor.com’s readers, there will definitely be more giveaways like this in the future. Thanks for your enthusiastic support during DearEditor.com’s inaugural month!

April 7, 2010:GIVEAWAY! a FREE Substantive Edit of one YA or MG Fiction Manuscript
The Editor is giving away a FREE Substantive Edit of one Young Adult or Middle Grade fiction manuscript to celebrate the one-month anniversary of DearEditor.com. To enter more than once, spread the word! See DearEditor.com home page for rules and to enter. Deadline: April 14, 2010.

April 6, 2010:The Editor Interviewed on SellingBooks.com
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, talks writing, editing, and why half of females aged 18 – 25 want to be run over by a truck in a new interview on SellingBooks.com. Check it out!

March 13, 2010:Interview on Writers’ Waiting Room about the Creation of DearEditor.com
An interview with The Editor, Deborah Halverson, was posted today on Writers’ Waiting Room. The interview focuses on the creation of DearEditor.com. The Writers’ Waiting Room was launched on the premise that all writers are waiting for something–the next idea, an agent, a publishing contract or the type of quiet that happens when the kids go to bed. It is run by writer Tami Casias, who interviews authors to get their take on living a writer’s life.

March 24, 2010: The Editor to Present Workshop at SCBWI’s Summer 2010 Conference
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be presenting a workshop at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators’ 39th annual summer conference, which will be held at the Century Hyatt in Los Angeles July 30 through August 2, 2010. Deborah’s session is “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting to Editors: 10 Tests a Novel Must Pass to Prove It’s REALLY Ready for Submission to Editors.” Registration for the conference starts April 28th at www.scbwi.org.

March 3, 2010: DearEditor.com Utters Its First Tweet
DearEditor.com just tweeted its first Gr8 1st Line: “The way I see it, being dead is not terribly far off from being on a cruise ship.” from Stiff by Mary Roach. For more DearEditor.com tweets, go to http://twitter.com/Dear_Editor or just tweet to @Dear_Editor.

March 3, 2010: DearEditor.com Launches
DearEditor.com has just gone live! The first post answers a writer’s question about how to sound like a teenager. Special thanks to this site’s designer, Theresa Stanton at Blogs for Photogs, who took the vision for DearEditor.com to a fantastic new level.

May 10, 2023: Listen to the Editor on the How Writers Write podcast

The Editor was interviewed on the writing craft podcast HOW WRITERS WRITE – Episode 111. She and host Brian T. Murphy talked YA fiction, establishing productive writing routines, and getting yourself unstuck when writers block strikes. Brian’s traditional end-of-interview Six Questions are wonderfully creative, so you don’t want to miss those. Question #3: “If you could pick a spirit book—this is the book you would choose to be reincarnated as—what book would it be?” How would YOU answer that? Here’s the link to the podcast to hear what book The Editor would be: https://bit.ly/3WEcApq. Or type How Writers Write episode 111 in your favorite podcast app.

May 1, 2023: Join The Editor for May 13th On-Line Picture Book Workshop

Join The Editor on May 13, 2023, for a virtual three-hour workshop “Kit and Caboodle: Crafting Irresistible Picture Books From Idea to Query,” hosted by the writing group Children’s Book Writers of Los Angeles. Learn the features of irresistible picture books and strong query letters and elevator pitches. Attendees will put pen-to-paper during the workshop, applying the learned techniques to their work-in-progress picture book manuscript(s) or to brainstorm a new project, and crafting a pitch and query letter. Current WIPs NOT required for attendance. For details and sign-up, visit the event page.

April 29, 2023: The Editor on SCBWI Podcast

The Editor enjoyed a great conversation with SCBWI Podcast host Theo Baker in the episode “From Slush Pile to Stand Out Manuscript with Deborah Halverson.” They got into the nitty-gritty of her editorial approach, the challenges and joys of writing, and her journey in publishing. Listen on your favorite podcast app, including these (click to listen): Spotify, Apple Podcasts, Amazon Podcasts.

September 14, 2022: The Editor Is Featured in Writers’ Forum Magazine

The Editor is honored to be invited to present to the Redwood Writers chapter meeting on September 17, 2022. The online event, “You’ve Written a Book, What’s Next?”, will be an hour-long webinar for beginners as well as advanced writers — published and pre-published — looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. The Redwood Writers is the largest branch of the California Writers Club.

August, 2022: The Editor Is Featured in Writers’ Forum Magazine

The Editor was honored to be Writers’ Forum magazine’s “Where I Write” feature this month. The feature focused on her writing (and editing!) visits to the San Diego Public Library’s public reading room, which is a gorgeous space. Her default writing spaces are the lake and fields by her home, but at least two days each week she picks a beautiful San Diego location like Balboa Park or the beach at the famous Hotel Del Coronado. She  chooses her locations sometimes by mood, but usually with some thematic link to what she’s writing or editing that day, then she shares photos on her social media to share the inspiration of the space. “Just give me a travel mug of hot cocoa, a beautiful space, and an engrossing project to write or edit and I’m happy.”

August 14, 2022: The Editor Talks Trends in Children’s Books with SCBWI Nebraska

The Editor spent an afternoon at a virtual meeting of SCBWI Nebraska. She talked about how the various categories of children’s books are performing, how some audience and market expectations are changing while others remain constant, and what trends seem to be playing out in the market and in acquisitions and in reader reception. Always wonderful to talk books with book folk.

June 2, 2022: The Editor Interviewed in “How Writers Write” Podcast

“How Writers Write” podcast host Host Brian Murphy and The Editor (aka Deborah Halverson) discuss what makes fiction “Young Adult Fiction,”  writing practice and process, and what it’s like to think like an editor. It’s a fabulous discussion — they dig deep into it! To listen to the podcast: Apple: https://apple.co/3m9kAhZ; Spotify: https://spoti.fi/3m8rpQR1.

December 6, 2021: The Editor Auctioning Picture Book Edit & Call for #WeNeedDiverseBooks Holiday Auction

The Editor is honored to be contributing to the #WeNeedDiverseBooks Campaign by offering a picture book edit and phone call with me in their Holiday Auction. Visit https://bit.ly/3HZPItU to bid on this and check out all the other offerings. The Holiday Auction ends 10pm Eastern 12/6/21.

October 1, 2021: Spend the Weekend with The Editor and SCBWI-SoCal Los Angeles for Writer’s Retreat 2021

Join The Editor, 2 agents, and 2 editors for a 2-day Virtual Writer’s Retreat for creatures of chapter books and middle grade/young adult fiction October 9-10, 2021. Between critique sessions with agents and editors, Deborah will do Craft Workshops on four story elements — character, plot, setting, and voice… plus revision techniques! bit.ly/3lz4Q7i

September 1, 2021: The Editor To Share How to Find the Right Editor for Your Book

Join The Editor on Sept 11, 2021, for an inspiring and informative market report and learn about new imprints and what they are requiring. She will also share her tips on researching editors to find the perfect fit for your book. Register at www.sandiego.scbwi.org.

August 22, 2021: The Editor Featured in Publishers Weekly!

Publishers Weekly covered The Editor in their article “2021 SCBWI Conference: Significant Market Transformation Due to COVID-19.” The article provides a peek into Deborah’s Market Report for the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators summer conference. http://pwne.ws/3lwpczD.

September 1, 2021: The Editor to Share How to Find the Right Editor for Your Book

Join The Editor on Sept 11, 2021, for an inspiring and informative market report and learn about new imprints and what they are requiring. She will also share her tips on researching editors to find the perfect fit for your book. Register at www.sandiego.scbwi.org.

August, 2021: The Editor at UCLA’s Writers Symposium

The Editor joined 11 amazing YA authors at UCLA’s writing symposium “The Young and the Reckless: Writing for Teens. She was in the a panel with award-winning, best-selling YA novelists Aiden Thomas and Adam Sass. “Put characters in unexpected settings to provoke surprising dialogue, unpredictable action, and stress.”-Deborah Halverson https://www.uclaextension.edu/ya-symposium

April 31, 2021: The Editor Teaches Submissions Strategies Twice in April

The Editor taught children’s book wrters and illustrators the ins and outs of submitting their manuscripts to agents and publishers twice this month. First for Children’s Books Writers of Los Angeles (CBW-LA), and then for SCBWI’s South and Central Ohio chapter. The session was called “SUBMISSION STUDIO: Writing Queries, Strategizing Submissions, and Ten Ways to Translate “No” to “Yes!”

January 15, 2021: The Editor’s Predictions for the 2021 Children’s Lit Market are Published in SCBWI INSIGHT

The Editor shared some predictions for children’s literature market in the January edition of SCBWI INSIGHT, a monthly enewsletter for members of the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators. INSIGHT features current children’s book hot topics, helpful hints, exclusive interviews and monthly contests. When talking about likelihoods for 2021, emerging trend-lines are intriguing to extend forward. The Editor appreciated the challenge and opportunity to do so. For an excerpt of the members-only article “What Will the Children’s Literature Market Look Like in 2021?: A Crystal Ball Prediction,” click here.

November 24, 2020: The Editor Edits a Book Benefitting Victims of Domestic Violence & Abuse

The Editor was honored to edit the Purple Projects picture book PENNY’S ADVENTURES IN SAN DIEGO. Sales benefit victims of domestic violence and abuse. For this book, thirteen San Diego County mayors and a deputy mayor each penned a chapter of a story about a kind-hearted purple butterfly named Penny visiting their respective cities and doing a good deed. Per the San Diego Union-Tribune,  “Deborah Halverson, an editor and publishing consultant, wrote chapter transitions and edited the book at no cost, while Danielle Ramirez created colorful illustrations…. The 85-page illustrated book, “Penny’s Adventure in San Diego,” is now available for pre-order for $25 and due for release in early December.”

October, 2020: The Editor Offering New Class for KidLit Writers

The Editor is honored to be offering a new class for Children’s Book Insider: “10 Things That Get Kidlit Manuscripts Rejected – and How to Avoid Them.” It will be 90 minutes of deep-digging writing tools for writers of picture books, chapter books, middle grade and young adult — fiction and nonfiction. The class will be live online Tuesday, Oct 13, 2020, with lifetime on-demand rewatching. Jump on over to the class page for the full details and sign-up. Children’s Book Insider is a place to take classes on all aspects of writing and publishing books for young readers.

May 29, 2020: The Editor to Offer a Digital Workshop for SCBWI (Free & Exclusive to SCBWI Members)

The Editor will present the fifth workshop in the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators‘s second Digital Workshops series. The series is for current SCBWI members, and is free — an offering for members during this unusual summer of lockdown and creative challenge. The Editor’s workshop will be “Submissions Studio: Writing Queries, Strategizing Submissions, and 10 Ways to Translate ‘No’ to ‘Yes!’” It’s for writers of all children’s book categories — beginners as well as advanced writers — looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. The workshop will include a master handout, sample query letters, and a quick-reference sheet for translating editorial feedback. Workshop date:  Thursday, July 2 , 2020, 1:00pm-2:00pm, Pacific Daylight Time. Registration opens Monday, June 29 , 2020, 10am PDT.

March 2, 2020: The Editor’s Article about E-Book Lending in SCBWI’s “Insight”

The Editor’s article “The E-Book Lending Battle Between Libraries and Macmillan, and What It Means to Authors” has been published in the March 2020 issue of  INSIGHT, the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrator‘s monthly enewsletter featuring current children’s book hot topics, helpful hints, exclusive interviews and monthly contests.

Feb 7, 2020: The Editor’s Children’s Book Publishing Overview Article in SCBWI’s “The Bulletin”

The Editor’s article “2019: A Year in Review” has been published in SCBWI’s Winter 2020 edition of THE BULLETIN, a biannual publication provided to members of the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators. The article is a children’s publishing industry overview, examining events and trends of 2019.

Jan 6, 2020:  The Editor to Ring in the New Decade with a Submissions Webinar

The Editor is excited to be asked by SCBWI – Texas: Austin to ring in the new year with a  submissions webinar. WRITING QUERIES, STRATEGIZING SUBMISSIONS, & INTERPRETING EDITORIAL FEEDBACK is for writers of all children’s book categories, and beginners as well as advanced writers looking to perfect their submission package and strategy. Deborah will do some critiques as part of the webinar: query letters, 1st 10 pages of a YA/MG novel, or a submission package of a query letter, synopsis, and 1st 10 pages.  The webinar will be January 14, 2020, 7-8:30pm CT (5-6:30pmPT, 8-9:30pmET). Details and registration at bit.ly/2N5pXNV. 

Oct 29, 2019:  The Editor to Present a YA/MG  Technique-Focused Webinar
J
oin The Editor for a technique-focused, hour-long Webinar designed to make YA/MG writers stronger self-editors and novelists on Nov 14, 2019.  THE ULTIMATE CHECKLIST FOR SUBMITTING YOUR MG/YA TO EDITORS: 10 Tests Your Manuscript Must Pass to Prove It’s Ready to Submit. “How can you know when your Middle Grade/Young Adult manuscript is ready to submit to agents or editors? You think it is, but how can you know for sure? Learn ten actionable tests for knowing when a novel is really, truly ready to submit . . . along with ways to whip the manuscript into shape if it fails a single one of them.” Hosted by SCBWI-Texas: Southwest.  Details and registration at  http://bit.ly/2pnztn1 

Sept 3, 2019: Interview with the Editor and Giveaway
The fabulous resource website for teen writers TipsForTeenAuthors.com is GIVING AWAY a signed copy of The Editor’s writing craft book WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES to go with her in-depth interview about freelance editing as a career. You can read the interview and enter the giveaway at bit.ly/2lxDbrV.

June 15, 2019: The Editor to Teach YA/MG Webinar July 16, 2019
On July 16, 2019, 7-8:30pm CT (5-6:30pm PT / 8-9:30pm ET), Deborah will present the webinar Subtext & Subplots: How to Deepen and Energize Your YA/MG Fiction.” She’ll teach techniques for using subtext and subplots to build rich, satisfying stories and fix common storytelling “problems.” She’ll also be critiquing for those who choose that additional item for the event. It will bosted by SCBWI-Texas: Austin. Details & registration at bit.ly/2ZgH2bs.

June 10, 2019: The Editor Teaches YA all day at SCBWI-Florida’s Orlando Mid-Year Workshop June 7-8, 2019
The Editor was honored to be in Orlando presenting a full-day YA workshop with editor Hannah Milton of Little, Brown Books for Young Readers and author/agent Eric Smith of P. S. Literary. The workshop had additional tracks for middle grade fiction, picture books, and illustration, plus full-day intensives and one-on-one critiques.

April 1, 2019: The Editor to Critique and Consult at SCBWI-Nebraska’s Writing Retreat Sept 27-29 2019
The Editor will be meeting with attendees and critiquing manuscripts for this wonderful weekend of writing and industry talk in beautiful Mahoney State Park. Cabins, a stunning park, and book talk–SCBWI’s Nebraska chapter is putting on an inspiring, supportive event for writers of picture books and middle grade/young adult fiction.

March 2, 2019: The Editor Celebrates Read Across America Day with 4th Graders
2019’s Read Across America Day was a blast for kids and their readers across the country. The Editor
read to two 4th-grade classes at a local elementary school as part of that school’s celebration. In fact, she was doubly honored: Not only was she asked to read to them that special day, the kids asked her to read one of her works-in-progress. Huzzah!

February 20, 2019: The Editor to Be a Guest Reader for NEA’s Read Across America Day 2019
On Saturday, March 2, 2019, schools, libraries, and communities across America will celebrate literacy with the National Education Association’s Read Across America Day. The Editor will be an honored Guest Reader at an elementary school in San Diego the Friday before.

October 18, 2018: The Editor Guest Posts a Character Development Tip at Cynsations Blog
The Editor is honored to be a Guest Blogger on the amazing Cynsations blog today, with her post “Deborah Halverson on Viewing Narrative Beats as ‘Revelatory’ Beats in MG/YA Fiction.” A snippet: “Perhaps we writers drop in those generic actions because we’re so focused on getting the first scenes in place; perhaps we’re just not seeing those beats for the opportunities they are. ‘Oh, what treasure troves those little actions can be!'”

October 14, 2018: New Look for DearEditor.com
The Editor and her website designer have been hard at work all summer, and today they unveil the fruits of labor: a fresh new look for DearEditor.com. To celebrate, The Editor is giving away a free edit of a picture book manuscript and a free partial edit of a novel manuscript via Rafflecopter — the giveaway entry deadline is October 22, 2018. 

September 8, 2018: The Editor Spoke at SCBWI-San Diego about the State of the Children’s Book Industry
In an hour-long up-to-the-minute report, The Editor shared insights and information about the state of the children’s book industry with the members and guests of the San Diego chapter of the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators. 

April 3, 2018: The Editor on Faculty at SCBWI Southern Breeze WIK ’18
The Editor will present two sessions at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators‘ Annual Summer Conference in L.A. August 3-6, 2018:

  • “Up-to-the-Minute Market Report: Industry Updates, Submissions, and New Imprints”
  • “Subplots & Subtext: How to Deepen and Energize Your MG/YA Fiction”

She’ll also critique manuscripts one-on-one. Conference registration opens April 17th @10am PT. Manuscript Consults are limited so if you’re interested, register asap on the 17th.

March 12, 2018: The Editor on Faculty at SCBWI Southern Breeze WIK ’18
The Editor was honored be a part of the faculty at SCBWI-Southern Breeze’s 2018 writing-and-illustrating for kids (WIK) conference, presenting sessions on non-rhyming picture books, revising young-adult and middle-grade novels for submission, and the state of the children’s book industry. The Southern Breeze chapter of the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators offers support to writers and illustrators in Alabama, Georgia, and the Florida panhandle. It’s an amazing group of creative and supportive people, attendees and conference organizers alike. If you live in that area and write/illustrate for young people, do yourself a solid and check out the group.  

September 23, 2017: The Editor Interview in New MG/YA Online Writing Course at Children’s Book Insider
The Editor is proud to contribute an interview called “Writing for Tweens, Teens and New Adults” to Children’s Book Insider’s Blueprint series, for their new Middle Grade/Young Adult Writing Blueprint. CBI always presents great content. Other fabulous interviews are a part of the new Blueprint — editor Mary Kole and author Matthew J. Kirby. Author Alice Kuipers is the instructor. You can check it out at writing blueprints.com

March 22, 2017: The Editor in Faculty at SCBWI 46th Annual Summer Conference July 7-10, 2017
The Editor is excited to present the annual Market Survey as well as a 3-hr writing intensive “How to Talk Like a Teen When You’re So Not One: Writing Dialogue in YA/MG Fiction” at SCBWI’s 46th Annual Summer Conference in LA. She will also be doing one-on-one critiques throughout the conference.

Expand your skills regarding Craft, Storytelling, Character, Genre Studies, Getting an Agent, Getting Published and Revision. The Editor’s sessions: “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Authentic Dialogue for Young Adult Fiction,” “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction”, and “Panel: Connecting With Middle-Grade and Young Adult Readers.”

Sept 28, 2016: Join The Editor at Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conf Oct 28-30, 2016
Please join The Editor at Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference October 28-30 in LA. Expand your skills regarding Craft, Storytelling, Character, Genre Studies, Getting an Agent, Getting Published and Revision. The Editor’s sessions: “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Authentic Dialogue for Young Adult Fiction,” “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction”, and “Panel: Connecting With Middle-Grade and Young Adult Readers.”

June 8, 2016: The Editor on YA Author Panel June 11 at Barnes & Noble in Santee, CA
The Editor will be a part of a YA author panel at Santee, California, Barnes & Nobel Saturday, June 11, at 2pm. The panel is “Writing a Book Is Like Riding a Roller Coaster!” Fellow panelists—fabulous YA writers—and The Editor will share stories of our writing ups and downs, and answer questions about writing and publishing: Debra Driza (MILO 2.0 series), Barrie Summy (I SO DON’T DO series and THE DISAPPEARANCE OF EMILY H.), Karri Thompson (MIRROR X, ASCENDENCY), and Matthew Ward (THE FANTASTIC FAMILY WHIPPLE, THE WAR OF THE WORLD RECORDS). Come join them!

May 30, 2016: The Editor Contributes “Believable Dialogue” Chapter to New Writer’s Digest Book 
The Editor is proud to have contributed Chapter 10 “Believable Dialogue” to Writer’s Digest’s new book CRAFTING DYNAMIC DIALOGUE, a comprehensive guide to writing compelling, authentic dialogue in fiction. The craft book is filled with advice and instruction from best-selling authors and instructors like Deborah Halverson (The Editor), Nancy Kress, Elizabeth Sims, Steven James, James Scott Bell, Donald Maass, Cheryl St. John, and many others. Covered in the book: bend the rules to create a specific effect; understand the role of dialogue in reader engagement; use dialect and jargon effectively; give every character a believable, unique voice; set the pace and tone; reveal specific character background details; generate tension and suspense; and utilize internal dialogue.

May 3, 2016: Join the Editor at SCBWI 2016 Summer Conference
Join The Editor at the SCBWI 2016 Summer Conference in Los Angeles July 29-31 (optional craft intensive a on Aug 1). She’ll be presenting the breakout “Crafting Swoon-Worthy Young Adult Romantic Relationships”, the “An Up-to-the-Minute Market Report” on the main stage, and the craft intensive “Crafting Plots that Push, Pull, and Provoke Characters… and Readers, Too.” She will also do 1-on-1 critiques.

August 26, 2015: Rave Review of WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES on SCBWI Blog
Author/blogger Lee Wind is well known for caring deeply about writers, so his recommendation of WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES on the SCBWI blog makes The Editor especially proud: “Deborah Halverson (who I’m always so impressed with) has put together a really useful guide… Her book is packed with good stuff.”

August 10, 2015: The Editor’s WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION wins San Diego Book Award
The Editor’s book WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION won the San Diego Book Award for 2014 Best Published Business Book. To celebrate, she is giving away a Free Full Manuscript Edit on DearEditor.com August 10, 2015 – August 14, 2015, with the winner to be announced on DearEditor.com August 15, 2015. Click over to the DearEditor.com announcement post for entry details.

April 3, 2015: The Editor to Present Market Report at SCBWI Annual Conference
The Editor will be at the 44th Annual SCBWI Summer Conference in Los Angeles July 31- August 2.  She’ll be presenting the “Up to the Minute Market Report,” the breakout sessions “Techniques in New Adult Fiction for YA Writers” and “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting Your MG/YA Novel to Editors,” the 3-hr intensive “Voice in MG/YA: How To Create an Authentic Teen Narrator,” and critiques. Registration opens April 9. For more info: http://www.scbwi.org/2015-summer-conference-in-los-angeles/

April 1, 2015: The Editor to Talk NA Fiction with Librarians
The Editor is looking forward to talking about New Adult fiction and its distinct traits and marketplace at the Mid America Library Alliance’s Workshop on New Adult Fiction on April 28. Librarians looking to be as informed as possible for the sake of their patrons. Love it!

Feb 12, 2015: The Editor Interviewed on Adventures in YA Publishing Blog
The Editor is honored to be featured on the fabulous blog Adventures in YA Publishing this week. The blog covers Young Adult Fiction in general, gives away YA books (several giveaways going on this week!), features advice from YA authors, and shares writing tips, and publishing information. Here’s an excerpt from the interview: “With the current enthusiasm for contemporary realistic stories, I see too many manuscripts that showcase above-average writing but fail to deliver a fresh angle on the contemporary teen experience. What makes your story about a regular kid in high school stand out from all those other well written stories about regular kids in high schools? I want to see more great writers find their distinct angles so that they can find publishers and places on bookstore shelves.

Jan 15, 2015: The Editor to Lead Simi Valley Writing Retreat January 16-18
The Editor is leading a fun and informative three-day intensive for SCBWI Cen-Cal Writers’ Retreat: An Editor’s Strategies for Reaching Fabulous Final Drafts. This intensive will consist of lectures, hands-on exercises, informal discussions, and the option of a small group critique session. For an additional fee, you can register for a manuscript critique and private consultation with The Editor.

Oct 8, 2014: Blog Tour and Tourwide Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway
The blog tour celebrating the publication of Writing New Adult Fiction is under way! From October 6 – 31, bloggers will be posting reviews of the book, interviews with The Editor, and guest blog posts written by The Editor covering craft, promotion, and the business of publishing New Adult fiction. All of the posts have giveaways, and there’s a tourwide giveaway of a free full manuscript edit. Here’s the link for the tour schedule, updated with excerpts and direct links as each post goes live: https://www.deareditor.com/?p=6644 And here’s the link for the free manuscript edit giveaway’s Rafflecopter entry form: http://www.rafflecopter.com/rafl/display/5440a354204/.

Oct 3, 2014: Be a Writing New Adult Fiction Blog Tour Host
The Editor is honored to be featured at literary agent Jill Corcoran’s blog, discussing what makes NA different from YA fiction: ““What’s the difference between ‘new’ adult and ‘young’ adult? My answer usually starts with a single word: sensibility.” Plus, Jill is running a contest for the feature, the winner of a signed copy of WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION being chosen by October 15, 2014.

Sept 17, 2014: Be a Writing New Adult Fiction Blog Tour Host
Want to be a host on The Editor’s WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION blog tour, featuring reviews, author interviews, spotlights, guest posts, and giveaways? The tour runs Oct 6-31. Sign up: http://bit.ly/1v19GIK

Sept 15, 2014: Interview with The Editor and Signed Book Giveaway on KC Maguire’s Blog
Stop by KC Maguire’s blog for an interview with The Editor and to enter the giveaway for a free signed copy of The Editor’s new book WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION. From the interview: “NA has become established and is pushing for a greater range of stories and thematic exploration, there seems to be a call for fiction that doesn’t necessarily get into the nitty gritty of body parts and movements. After all, not everyone who wants to read about the NA experience wants such graphic detail, and not every writer is comfortable writing it. Ultimately, the details of the sex acts aren’t necessary in order to explore love at this stage of life. Serve up emotionally satisfying relationships. Craft stories that build up sexual anticipation through love denied, teased, and toyed with. A much-anticipated kiss can be more dramatically powerful than a perfunctory graphic groping. That’s why I dedicate a full chapter of my book to the crafting believable, satisfying romance. And it’s why I say that explicit sex scenes are currently expected but maybe not so essential in the long run. The degree of explicitness in NA fiction is an evolving element.”

Sept 2, 2014: The Editor Joins Faculty of  SCBWI-Missouri Fall Conference Sept 6-7, 2014
The Editor will present the “State of the Market” and lead the intensive “How to Build Your Own Teenager” at the SCBWI-Missouri Fall Conference in St. Charles, Missouri, September 6-7, 2014.

Sept 2, 2014: The Editor’s Article “NA Fiction for the YA Writer” in Sept/Oct Issue of SCBWI’s The Bulletin
“Writers see an overlap between ‘mature YA’ and NA and wonder what it means for their own stories about older teens…. There are essential differences in story content, though, and knowing those can help you determine if your mature YA is actually an NA offering.” From The Editor’s article in the Sept/Oct issue of SCBWI’s THE BULLETIN. If you’re an SCBWI member and want to read it, log into your profile page and click on resource library, then on Bulletin in the dropdown menu.

July 1, 2014: The Editor to Join Faculty of  Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference Aug 15-17, 2014
Join The Editor for her 3-hour Boot Camp “Writing Riveting New Adult Fiction” and her 1-hour breakout session “How to Hide the Seams for Smooth, Flowing Fiction” at the Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference at the Hyatt Regency Century Plaza – Los Angeles August 15-17. For details about the sessions and other award-winning, bestselling authors and publishing professionals at the Writer’s Digest Novel Writing Conference, click here.

May 12, 2014: The Editor’s Interview about the SCBWI Conference, Uses for Setting, and the Difference Between NA and YA Fiction
“Saying NA fiction is just YA with sex is akin to saying YA fiction is just stories of high school romance.” Insightful interviewer Lee Wind asks The Editor about being on the faculty of SCBWI’s upcoming summer conference in Los Angeles (Aug 1-4) and also about the difference between “voice” and “sensibility” in writing, characteristics of New Adult Fiction, and other writing advice. Check out the full interview here.

April 18, 2014: The Editor Presenting Market Keynote at SCBWI 43rd Annual Summer Conference in Los Angeles, Aug 1 – 4
Join the Editor and other authors, agents, and publishing professionals at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators annual info-packed 4-day summer conference. In addition to presenting the market keynote, the Editor will present the session “New Adult Fiction for the Young Adult Writer” and the intensive “Crafting a Youthful Narrative Voice and Sensibility in MG/YA Fiction.” She’s also available for one-on-one critiques. Join the fun! Registration opens Monday, April 21, 10am PST. Intensives fill up FAST.

December 6, 2013: Meet the Editor at the New Adult Sleepover Weekend in Savannah, GA, December 6 – 8
Check out the inaugural New Adult Sleepover Weekend, an event for readers and authors of New Adult fiction. Panels about NA characters and publishing, swag, meet-and-greets, parties . . . a fun and informative weekend! The Editor will be there, meeting and greeting and taking in all things NA. Savannah Riverfront Marriott, 100 General McIntosh Boulevard, Savannah, GA 31401.

November 22, 2013: Meet the Editor on YA Panel at San Diego’s Mira Mesa B&N on November 22
As part of Barnes & Noble’s Discovery Friday event Friday, November 22, at 6pm, the Editor will be part of a lively panel about books for young people with Shannon Messenger, author of the middle grade series Keeper of the Lost Cities and the teen trilogy Let the Sky Fall, and Debra Driza, author of the YA thriller Mila 2.0, the first in a series currently being developed as a series for ABC. The panel will be moderated by fabulous Full Circle Literary agent Taylor Martindale. It’s Discovery Friday at the B&N that day, so there will be giveaways all day, including Catching Fire posters, John Green posters, Legos, etc. There will also be a special musical performance by Stacey Leathersich at 8:30. B&N: 10775 Westview Pkwy, San Diego, CA 92126.

August 22, 2013: The Editor Interview Delves Into How Writers Can Succeed in Publishing
In an interview by N.W. Harris, author of Joshua’s Tree, which currently tops the Goodreads 2013 Summer Reading list, The Editor talks about writing fiction versus nonfiction, her path to publication and editorial career, and three things new writers must do to compete in the current, highly competitive publishing industry: “Publishing is an industry, as unartful as it is to admit that, and writers who want their books out there for readers to buy must consider themselves players rather than pawns.” Full the full interview, visit NWHarrisBooks.

August 5, 2013: The Editor Presents State of the Market Keynote at SCBWI Summer Conference
Publishers Weekly included The Editor in its coverage of the 42nd Annual SCBWI Summer Conference: “Deborah Halverson, founder of DearEditor.com, delivered a keynote titled Market Report: An Up-to-the-Minute State of the Industry, which compiled the results of interviews with 17 publishing insiders…. Halverson reported that sales are up for picture books, but editors are still cautious about the category. Chapter books and early readers remain challenging….” For more highlights from The Editor’s keynote, click over to PW’s article.

May 7, 2013: The Editor to Pen ‘New Adult Fiction’ Craft Book
The Editor will publish Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction with Writer’s Digest Books in Fall 2014. Writing and Selling New Adult Fiction is a hands-on guide featuring essential information, steps, and techniques necessary to turn a clever concept into a top-notch novel for 18- to 26-year-olds as well as the teen and adult crossover audience. The book will include advice on self-publishing into the New Adult marketplace, insider tips for finding the right agent and/or editor and preparing a stand-out submission package for traditional publishers, and an extensive chapter on self-marketing to help writers move boldly into the realm of self-promotion.

April 20, 2013: The Editor to Deliver Keynote at SCBWI 42nd Summer Conference
The Editor will deliver the “Market Report: An Up-to-the-Minute State of the Industry” keynote at the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators 42nd Summer Conference in Los Angeles August 2 – 5, 2013. She will also teach an intensive called “How to Build Your Own Teenager: Techniques for Writing Believable MG/YA Characters, and two one-hour breakout sessions called “The Read-Aloud Factor: Achieving Rhythm without Relying on Rhyme in Picture Books” and “Setting, Wherefore Art Thou?: The Surprising Benefits and How-To’s of Setting in MG/YA Fiction.” For information about attending the conference, click over to the conference home page.

March 18, 2013: Susan Stevens Crummel Joins Revision Week Lineup
The Editor is thrilled to announce that award-winning picture book author Susan Stevens Crummel will be joining the Revision Week lineup! Loved for her solo books as well as her collaborations with author/illustrator (and sister!) Janet Stevens, Susan will shed light on the ins and outs of working through a highly collaborative revision process.

March 15, 2013: Announcing DearEditor.com’s Revision Week 2013, March 24-30
It’s almost time for DearEditor.com’s second annual Revision Week. March 24-30 The Editor will host five authors—who have published a combined 270 best-selling and award-winning books—for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches at DearEditor.com. Who’s stopping by? Bestselling and award-winning authors Laura Griffin (romance novels), Matthew J. Kirby (YA novels), Bruce Hale (chapter book series and picture books), Peter Economy (non-fiction), and Larry Dane Brimner (picture books, chapter books, easy readers, nonfiction… you name it!), that’s who! The Editor will add to the excitement with daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and a grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

Jan 26, 2013: OnText Blog Features DearEditor.com
DearEditor.com gets the thumbs up in the OnText blog feature “Writing Children’s or Young Reader Books? Great Source of Publishing Help.” OnText is hosted by ghostwriter Maryan Pelland. Pelland calls The Editor “a wealth of information for writers, authors, and ghostwriters to ask questions about the craft of writing or about the very confusing and frustrating publishing industry. Her answers are concise and pull-no-punches.”

Dec 1, 2012: The Editor Celebrates Her First Picture Book with a FREE EDIT Giveaway
The Editor believes writers should celebrate every milestone—and she’s got a milestone to celebrate with her readers. Her first picture book, Letters to Santa, has just published and she’s feting it by giving away a FREE edit of a picture book manuscript up to 2,000 words. Deadline: December 4, 2012. Read the giveaway post for full entry details.

Oct 17, 2012: The Editor Announces Three New Books
The Editor’s three books for Rubicon’s Remix struggling readers series have launched! Brave New World: Cyber World, Brave New World: Meltdown, and Brave New World: Robotic World. To page through previews of the books electronically, visit the Remix: Brave New World series page.

Sept 17, 2012: Finding Bliss Blog Hosts the The Editor, Holds Free Book Giveaway
Excerpt: “Revision can be daunting. . . . Why not give your brain a break by breaking your task into focused chunks? With this approach, you’d pick a writing element, say plot, and ignore everything but that. Working Big Picture chunks to small detail chunks rather than page by page, you’d focus not on revising the story but on honing single elements. Gone is that scattered, overwhelmed feeling.” Read the rest of The Editor’s guest post “Chunking Your Revision” on Laura Howard’s blog Finding Bliss, and enter her giveaway for a free copy of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies.

August 27, 2012: An Interview with The Editor
Excerpt: “The trick is to make something big happen in the story to create a big emotional impact that would raise the emotional temperature of the story and keep it from being too quiet.” You can the full interview with The Editor on Natasha Yim’s blog “I Must Be a Masochist – A Writer’s Life.”

August 23, 2012: Coverage of The Editor’s SCBWI conference Market Trends Keynote
The Editor complied the “2012 SCBWI Market Survey: Publishers of Books For Young Readers” report for the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators, and gave a keynote at the recent SCBWI Summer Conference about what she learned from her survey – giving attendees the current market needs and trends. To read coverage of her keynote, click over to “SCBWI Summer Conference: Market Keynote Follow-Up with Deborah Halverson” on the SCBWI Blog.

June 28, 2012: The Editor Advises How to Use Subtext as a tool on Quirk and Quill
The Editor’s advice about using subtext to puff up a “flat” fiction manuscript is featured today on Quirk and Quill, a blog hosted by 10 alumni of the Vermont College of Fine Arts writing program. To read the post, click over to “Serving Up Subtext” on Quirk and Quill.

May 25, 2012: The Editor Visits Stanford…Virtually
The Editor talked books and writing during an online chat session today with a Stanford writing class that uses her Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies as their text. The Editor is honored that schools continue to adopt the book for their classes.

Mar 23, 2012: Join The Editor at SCBWI National Conference in L.A. Aug 3-6
The Editor will be at SCBWI’s 2012 Summer Conference in Los Angeles Aug 3-6. She’ll be presenting the Current Market Report keynote, a breakout session on writing dialogue, an intensive on revising your MG/YA novel, and an intensive on creating youthful narrative sensibility. Registration starts April 18 at 10am. Check out the full info on the SCBWI conference page.

Mar 4, 2012: DearEditor.com’s Revision Week with 8 Bestselling, Award-Winning Authors
DearEditor.com brings together eight prolific, bestselling, award-winning authors for Revision Week, 7 days of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day:

  • Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger.
  • Kathleen Krull, author of more than 60 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers.
  • R.L. LaFevers, author of the 13 novels for young people.
  • Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, popular chapter book collaborators.
  • Mark A. Clements, horror/suspense author, screenwriter, and prolific ghostwriter.
  • Nathan Bransford, top blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books.
  • Rachel Caine, New York Times, USA Today, and internationally bestselling author of more than 30 novels.

Feb 26, 2012: DearEditor.com Now on Google+
DearEditor.com is pleased to announce the DearEditor.com Google+ page, sharing industry news, creative inspirations, and writing tips to keep you in the publishing know. The new page complements the DearEditor.com Facebook page and the @Dear_Editor Twitter feed.

Feb 26, 2012: DearEditor.com Goes Mobile
DearEditor.com is now mobile-friendly. With the new mobile design, you can easily read new posts and comments on your mobile device of choice, and you can post your own comments on-the-go. With a simple click on the arrow at the top of your mobile display, you can access archives, categories, and any page on the DearEditor.com website.

The Editor to appear on “Writers Voices” Radio Feb 17, 2012
The Editor will appear live on “Writers Voices” 1-2pm CST, Feb 17, 2012. “Writers Voices” airs on KRUU FM 100.1, an open source, solar-powered community radio station that broadcasts to the larger Fairfield, Iowa, area and has worldwide listenership via the web. Each week they air an hour-long interview with a writer, agent, editor, publisher, or someone else connected to the world of writing. To listen to the show live, tune in to KRUU FM radio or go to online at http://www.writersvoices.com. Hear the rebroadcast Monday Feb 20 8 AM on KRUU FM or download it from the archives: http://www.writersvoices.com or http://www.kruufm.com/station/archives/61.

Free Online Workshop with The Editor Feb 21-23, 2012
The Institute of Children’s Literature website is hosting an online YA workshop featuring The Editor. The drop-in Q&A-format workshop takes place on the ICL’s message board, which anyone can read (no registration required). If you want to post a question, you do need to register (for FREE) by sending email to jan.fields@forums.institutechildrenslit.com with the username you want. Check out the ICL’s Guest Speaker archives while you’re there.

Feb 7, 2012:The Editor on “How to Promote Your Book” Podcast
As part of her blog tour for her book How to Promote Your Children’s Books, author/illustrator Katie Davis focused her regular podcast on “Promoting Your Book.” The Editor has a guest appearance. See the episode description here: http://katiedavis.com/how-to-promote-your-book/. Or click here to hear it directly.

Feb 6, 2012:DearEditor.com to host How to Promote Your Children’s Book Blog Tour
Author/illustrator Katie Davis is a tireless promoter whose 9 children’s books have sold over 250,000 copies. On February 6, 2012, Katie shares what she’s learned about promoting books–and she’s giving away a free download of her new eBook How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller. Follow Katie’s full blog tour for more promo insights & giveaways:

Dec 4, 2011:YA Fusion blog Interviews The Editor
YA Fusion, a blog written by YA fiction writers about the amazing world of young adult fiction, interviewed The Editor and hosted a giveaway of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. The interviews spans the writing, editing, and reading realm, and offers tips to writers about gauging market trends and walking the line in “edgy” fiction. http://bit.ly/viGL8O

Oct 19, 2011:More Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut: An Interview with The Editor
Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut blog cointinues with an interview with The Editor, covering what makes YA fiction so popular, what aspiring writers should do, and what young readers should know: http://bit.ly/qEOyqs.

Oct 17, 2011:The Editor Featured During Spotlight Week at The Writing Nut
The Writing Nut blog features The Editor and her book Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies all week. Stop by for a review of the book, an interview with The Editor—aka Deborah Halverson—and a giveaway: http://bit.ly/r0l1Ht

Sept 25, 2011:San Diego Union-Tribune Dubs Writing YA Fiction For Dummies “Tremendously Helpful”
The San Diego Union-Tribune dubbed The Editor’s new Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies a Recommended Read, calling it, “Fun, insightful and tremendously helpful.”

Sept 24, 2011:The Editor Presenting at San Diego Public Library Book Festival Oct 1
The Editor is honored to be a part of the SAN DIEGO COUNTY LIBRARY BOOK FESTIVAL Saturday, Oct 1, at the Encinitas Library. Speakers include YA great Ellen Hopkins, bestseller Lisa See, and Skinny Bitch series author Kim Barnouin. The Editor will be presenting in the community room 5 to 6pm. Check out the festival website for a full list of great speakers.

Sept 24, 2011:The Editor Teaches YA at SCWC Conf in Newport Beach Sept 24
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be presenting “Writing for Teens? Then Think Like One” at the Southern California Writers’ Conference – LA on Sept 24, 2011. Here’s her session description: “Whether your narrator is your young main character or an all-knowing omniscient being, there are ways to convince young readers that you understand them and their view of the world—and to hook’em good and hard in the process. This session teaches techniques for creating a narrative sensibility that reflects the way teens think, resulting in teen fiction that “clicks” with young readers.” Click on over to the SCWC website for details about this conference, which runs Sept 23-25.

August 3, 2011: The Editor featured on Writing on the Sidewalk Blog
The Editor,aka Deborah Halverson, talks writing, Legos, and banging on drums in “Writing on the Sidewalk”, the blog of authors Suzanne Santillan and Sarah Wones Tomp.

August 3, 2011: The Editor on The League of Extraordinary Writers Blog
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, is an interview guest on The League of Extraordinary Writers, a blog hosted by dystopian authors Jeff Hirsch, Elana Johnson, Julia Karr, Beth Revis, and Angie Smibert. With Q-and-A about the most common pitfalls for writers, the current rise in YA lit, a list of must-reads for writers, and the viability of self-publishing as an alternative pub path for writers, this interview is full of great information. Check it out!

June 11, 2011: Announcing WYAFFD Blog Tour
Please drop in on this 8-stop blog tour celebrating the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. Interviews, guest blog posts on craft, promotion, and chapter books, and a grand finale free webinar. Full schedule:

July 18: Shrinking Violet Promotions
July 19: SCBWI Children’s Market blog
July 20: QueryTracker.net
July 21: Elizabeth O. Dulemba Blog
July 22: Cheryl Rainfield Blog
July 25: Story Connection
July 26: The Got Story Countdown
July 27: Free “Meet the Editor” webinar w/ Katie Davis

June 29, 2011: Interviews, Guest Blogs, Podcasts, & Giveaways in Support of the WYAFFD Virtual Book Launch
Visit these websites and blogs for exclusive content and giveaways in support of the Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummiea Virtual Book Launch from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com:

June 29, 2011: Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies Virtual Book Launch Begins!
Celebrate the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com with daily “Free First Chapter Critique” giveaways, free downloads, excerpts from the book, and profiles of the 13 amazing authors, editors, and agents who so generously contributed sidebars to the book. As the grand finale, The Editor is giving away a “Free Full Manuscript Edit” on the final day. Click here for details about the 7-Day Virtual Book Launch.

June 21, 2011: Announcing the Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies Virtual Book Launch
Celebrate the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies from June 29 to July 5 here on DearEditor.com with daily “Free First Chapter Critique” giveaways, free downloads, excerpts from the book, and profiles of the 13 amazing authors, editors, and agents who so generously contributed sidebars to the book. As the grand finale, The Editor is giving away a “Free Full Manuscript Edit” on the final day. Click here for details about the 7-Day Virtual Book Launch.

June 20, 2011: Video Writing Tip from The Editor
Click over to Tina Nichols Coury’s blog Tales from the Rushmore Kid for a one-minute video tip from The Editor. The topic: Checking to see if your protagonist has completed a full character arc.

June 8, 2011: Free Webinar with The Editor July 27, 2011
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be conducting a free webinar with author Katie Davis on July 27, 2011, 9:00-10:oo pm EST. For details or to sign up, visit the webinar information page!

June 6, 2011: Writing YA Fiction for Dummies Virtual Book Launch June 29-July 5
DearEditor.com will be the site of a huge 7-day virtual book launch for the publication of The Editor’s new book WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES. Visit every day for exclusive free downloads, book excerpts, profiles of lauded MG/YA author contributors, and daily Free Critique/Full MS Edit Giveaways. More details to come!

June 6, 2011:The Editor to Critique at SCBWI-LA National Summer Conf.
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be critiquing manuscripts at the Society of Children’s Books Writers and Illustrators 40th Annual Summer Conference in Los Angeles, August 5-8, 2011. Click on over to SCBWI’s conference site for details about this incredible event.

May 16, 2011:The Editor Gives Setting Tips in Hunger Mountain
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, is honored to have an article featured in the summer 2011 issue of HUNGER MOUNTAIN, the Vermont College of Fine Arts’ wonderful journal of the arts. In “Where the Teens Are: 5 Ways to Freshen Up YA Fiction’s Favorite Settings,” Deborah offers writers tips for making familiar teen fiction settings like school and the main character’s room feel provocative instead of inevitable. Click on over to Hunger Mountain for more.

May 11, 2011:The Editor Featured in Anderson Valley Post
Anderson Valley Post, the local paper of Anderson Valley, California, ran an article featuring The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, and her co-faculty for the Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop. To read about Edgar Award-winning author Charlie Price, author/illustrator Dr. Mira Reisberg, and Deborah, click over to Anderson Valley Post. To learn more about the May 21, 2011, conference, go to the conference website.

April 11, 2011:Registration Now Open for Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop
Registration is open for the Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop, to be held May 21, 2011, in Cottonwood, CA (17 miles south of Redding, CA, and approx. 2 hours from Sacramento). The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be teaching at the event, which is dedicated to helping children’s book writers revise their young adult novels and picture books. The 1-day workshop is hosted by SCBWI‘s California North/Central chapter, with Edgar Mystery Award nominee author Charlie Price and award-winning picture book illustrator, art director, designer, and educator Dr. Mira Reisberg filling out the faculty. For more information or to register (deadline May 1, 2011), contact scbwicanorthcentral@gmail.com or go to the Conference website.

Mar 2, 2011:SCBWI Chapter Features The Editor in Kite Tales
The Editor (Deborah Halverson) lays down some scene advice in the 2011 Spring Issue of Kite Tales, the newsletter for the SCBWI Tri-Regions of Southern California. The chapter has shared a link to the newsletter, which is full of fantastic information: Kite Tales, Spring 2011. For more information about SCBWI (Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators), go to SCBWI.org.

Jan 26, 2011:The Editor to Talk to Teachers about Supporting Young Writers
June 20-23, 2011, teachers earning their MAs will gather at the 32nd San Diego State University Summer Conference, and The Editor (Deborah Halverson) will be there with them. Her session, “BIF! BAM! POW!: Helping Young Writers Release Their Inner Heroes,” focuses on helping young writers tap into the heroes within themselves in order to write about characters who overcome their fears and flaws for heroic outcomes.

Jan 25, 2011:The Editor at Cottonwood Revision Intensive
On May 21, 2011, The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be helping children’s book writers revise their young adult novels and picture books at the Cottonwood Revision Intensive in Cottonwood, California. The 2-day workshop is hosted by SCBWI‘s California North/Central chapter, with author Charlie Price filling out the faculty. For more information or to register, contact scbwicanorthcentral@gmail.com

Nov 29, 2010:The Editor Goes In Between Scenes for FictionNotes
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, wrote a guest post today about why it’s crucial that a writer knows what happens in the white space between scenes for author Darcy Pattison’s information-loaded blog “Fiction Notes.” Darcy is a writing teacher and the author of The Book Trailer Manual (www.booktrailermanual.com), several picture books, and the teen fantasy novel The Wayfinder.

Nov 29, 2010:Author Mary E. Pearson Becomes 1st Guest Editor for the Day
As DearEditor.com’s first Guest Editor for the Day, author Mary E. Pearson stepped in to help a frustrated writer battle back against writer’s block. Mary is the award-winning author of five novels for teens, including the new The Miles Between.

Nov 27, 2010:New Feature Added to DearEditor.com – Guest Editor for the Day
DearEditor.com is adding a new feature: Guest Editor for the Day. Starting Monday, November 29, The Editor will occasionally hand over her editorial pen to a publishing colleague who will field a question that falls within his or her realm of expertise. In this way The Editor hopes to add to the depth of the knowledge bandied about DearEditor.com. The more voices we hear, the wiser we become. First up: award-winning author Mary E. Pearson.

Nov 24, 2010:The Editor Answers Callers’ Questions on “Brain Burps About Books” Podcast
Deborah Halverson, aka The Editor, answered listeners’ questions about publishing children’s books on author Katie Davis‘s podcast Brain Burps About Books.” If you’ve got a question you’d like Deborah to answer in a follow-up podcast, call Katie’s toll free line at 888-522-1929 and leave a message.

Nov 11, 2010:One Week to Phone In Questions to The Editor
On November 18th, author Katie Davis will tape an interview with Deborah Halverson, aka The Editor, for Katie’s podcast “Brain Burps About Books.” If you’ve got a question you’d like Deborah to answer in the podcast, call Katie’s toll free line at 888-522-1929 by November 18th and leave a message. DearEditor.com will post an update when that podcast is available for listening.

Oct 11, 2010:Six-Month Free Picture Book Edit Giveaway Winner Announced
Congratulations to Jennifer Carson, the winner of the FREE EDIT giveaway celebrating DearEditor.com’s first six months. Jennifer’s manuscript is entitled Stinking Beauty. To the rest of DearEditor.com’s readers, thanks for a fun first half year. Keep those questions, comments, and anecdotes coming! The more we hear, the more we learn.

Sept 20, 2010:GIVEAWAY! a FREE EDIT of one Picture Book Manuscript
The Editor is giving away a FREE EDIT of one picture book manuscript to celebrate the six-month anniversary of DearEditor.com. To enter more than once, spread the word! See the DearEditor.com giveaway announcement for rules and to enter. Deadline: October 10, 2010.

July 29, 2010: The Editor to Write “Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies”
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, has signed on to write “Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies” for Wiley Publishers’ For Dummies… line, to hit stores June 2011. To learn more about the For Dummies… books, go to www.ForDummies.com.

June 18, 2010: The Editor Guest Posts about Setting in Novels on “Cynsations”The Editor, Deborah Halverson, wrote a guest post today about setting in novels on author Cynthia Leitich Smith’s fabulous blog “Cynsations.” Cynthia is a New York Times and Publishers Weekly best-selling author of YA Gothic fantasies, including Tantalize and Eternal, as well as several picture books for children. Here’s a teaser from Deborah’s guest post, “Setting, Wherefore Art Thou?“: “We need setting in our stories. We need the richness that makes up setting, the sensual engagement that can only come from hearing the crunch of frosty grass under the protagonist’s bare feet, or feeling the sudden whispery kiss of a spider’s web dangling from the eaves. We’d just have a girl walking across a lawn and a creepy old house. Where’s the joy in that?” Check out Cynthia’s blog for the whole post. To learn more about Cynthia, go to CynthiaLeitichSmith.com.

May 31, 2010: The Editor’s Article about Teen Fiction & Melodrama Appears in “The Inside Story

The Editor, Deborah Halverson, wrote the feature article “Melodrama Isn’t a Four-Letter Word” for this month’s “The Inside Story”, a monthly newsletter by Bruce Hale, author of two hilarious chapter book series—the Chet Gecko series, and the Underwhere series. Here’s a teaser from Deborah’s article: “So, you’re thirty-something writing a teen novel, and you want your narrative voice to sound convincingly youthful? That’s an outstanding goal. A believable voice makes all the difference in the success of a manuscript. But how do you actually do it? The answer might surprise you.” To subscribe to “The Inside Story” and read Deborah’s full article, go to http://bit.ly/b3yXd5. To learn more about Bruce Hale, go to BruceHale.com.

May 25, 2010: The Editor Interviewed for SCBWI’s “Industry PROfiles
The Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators has just posted an on-line interview with DearEditor.com’s resident Editor, Deborah Halverson. The interview focuses on Deborah’s literary journey from playroom to publishing house to author’s chair, and explores how she balances her roles as Author/Editor/Mom. The full interview appears in SCBWI’s “Industry PROfiles.”

May 3, 2010: The Editor to Speak at SCBWI-San Diego Chapter Meeting
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, will present “How Do You Know Your Manuscript Is Ready for Submission?” at the season-opening meeting of the SCBWI-San Diego chapter, on September 11, 2010, from 2-4pm, in Hahn Nursing Hall on the University of San Diego campus. For details about the meeting and the chapter, visit their website.

April 15, 2010: One-Month Anniversary Edit Giveaway Winner Announced
Congratulations to Annemarie O’Brien, winner of the giveaway of a free substantive edit of a YA/MG manuscript. Annemarie’s manuscript is an upper middle grade novel titled Dance with Borzois. Congratulations, Annemarie! To the rest of DearEditor.com’s readers, there will definitely be more giveaways like this in the future. Thanks for your enthusiastic support during DearEditor.com’s inaugural month!

April 7, 2010:GIVEAWAY! a FREE Substantive Edit of one YA or MG Fiction Manuscript
The Editor is giving away a FREE Substantive Edit of one Young Adult or Middle Grade fiction manuscript to celebrate the one-month anniversary of DearEditor.com. To enter more than once, spread the word! See DearEditor.com home page for rules and to enter. Deadline: April 14, 2010.

April 6, 2010:The Editor Interviewed on SellingBooks.com
The Editor, Deborah Halverson, talks writing, editing, and why half of females aged 18 – 25 want to be run over by a truck in a new interview on SellingBooks.com. Check it out!

March 13, 2010:Interview on Writers’ Waiting Room about the Creation of DearEditor.com
An interview with The Editor, Deborah Halverson, was posted today on Writers’ Waiting Room. The interview focuses on the creation of DearEditor.com. The Writers’ Waiting Room was launched on the premise that all writers are waiting for something–the next idea, an agent, a publishing contract or the type of quiet that happens when the kids go to bed. It is run by writer Tami Casias, who interviews authors to get their take on living a writer’s life.

March 24, 2010: The Editor to Present Workshop at SCBWI’s Summer 2010 Conference
The Editor, aka Deborah Halverson, will be presenting a workshop at the Society of Children’s Books Writers & Illustrators’ 39th annual summer conference, which will be held at the Century Hyatt in Los Angeles July 30 through August 2, 2010. Deborah’s session is “The Ultimate Checklist for Submitting to Editors: 10 Tests a Novel Must Pass to Prove It’s REALLY Ready for Submission to Editors.” Registration for the conference starts April 28th at www.scbwi.org.

March 3, 2010: DearEditor.com Utters Its First Tweet
DearEditor.com just tweeted its first Gr8 1st Line: “The way I see it, being dead is not terribly far off from being on a cruise ship.” from Stiff by Mary Roach. For more DearEditor.com tweets, go to http://twitter.com/Dear_Editor or just tweet to @Dear_Editor.

March 3, 2010: DearEditor.com Launches
DearEditor.com has just gone live! The first post answers a writer’s question about how to sound like a teenager. Special thanks to this site’s designer, Theresa Stanton at Blogs for Photogs, who took the vision for DearEditor.com to a fantastic new level.

Newsflash: A DearEditor.com FREE EDIT Giveaway

Dear Readers…

To celebrate the end of the summer writing season, the Editor is giving away a FREE Substantive Edit of a manuscript up to 80,000 words. Deadline: August 28, 2012. Read on for rules….

Summer is winding down, kids are heading back to school, and writers across the land are taking stock of their summer writing. I can’t think of a better way to celebrate our transition into the next writing season than giving away a free Substantive Edit* of one fiction or nonfiction manuscript. Here are the rules:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE.
  3. Your manuscript SHALL NOT EXCEED 80,000 WORDS.
  4. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.
  5. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, August 28, 2012, PST.
  6. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on August 29, 2012, on DearEditor.com and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. DO NOT send your manuscript or any portion of it. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

*In a “Substantive Edit,” the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience, as the Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.”

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

 

Is a Blog Tour Worth the Trouble?

/

Dear Editor…

You coordinated and completed a blog tour for your book a while back. Did you feel that it was worth all of your hard work? If did it all again, would you do anything differently?

Thanks,
A.

Dear A….

Based on my 8-stop blog tour and research with authors and marketing pros, I declare blog tours an essential book promo tool. Blog tours harness the power of social media, spreading news of your book almost instantly to countless people through the virtual ripple effect of retweets and shares. Two points: 1) Blog tours are about the readers, not you. Tailor your interviews or guest posts to each site, with tips, links, or useful info about your topic, themes, or expertise. Give away books or informative downloadables. People don’t share pitches; they share useful stuff. 2) Shared spotlights are BIGGER spotlights. Give your hosts a full schedule with blog links so they can promote each other. As each tour stop goes “live,” give its direct link to hosts to promote that day. In your social media, emphasize your host sites over your book. With pre-tour promotion and post-tour thanks, you get 3-4 weeks of tour-focused online chatter. The Virtual Ripple Effect is worth the work.

Happy writing!
The Editor

News from DearEditor.com

Dear Readers…

The Editor has been quiet for a couple of weeks, but with good reason: she was preparing the keynote “An Up to the Minute Survey of Market Needs and Trends” for the Society of Children’s Book Writers and Illustrators International Conference this weekend. She has just delivered her talk to a full crowd of 1,200, and you can glimpse some highlights at the SCBWI Conference Blog: http://bit.ly/PUnTAo. Starting next week, The Editor will be back online, feverishly answering reader questions about the craft, market, and business of writing.

Happy writing!

 

“Deborah Halverson is the source of one of the most valuable gems in the conference packets, ‘The 2012 SCBWI Market Survey: Publishers of Books for Young Readers.'” Read more at SCBWI’s Conference Blog http://bit.ly/PUnTAo

The Secret to Writing Dystopian Fiction?

/

Dear Editor…

I’m attempting to find a good how-to article on book on how to get started on writing a dystopian novel. Any suggestions??

Thanks!
Karen

Dear Karen…

“Dystopian” is the word of the week, with The Hunger Games movie setting records and dystopian novels making trumpeted debuts (Lissa Price’s Starters) and landing on the bestseller lists, as did Jeff Hirsch’s debut The Eleventh Plague. Jeff was a Guest Editor here recently addressing fears that dystopian was “over.” Read that, then visit The League of Extraordinary Writers, a blog by 10 writers immersed in the craft and news of the genre. But don’t focus on learning to “write dystopian.” Learn to write strong characters. Dystopian fiction is distinguished by characters who embody the quest to understand humanity. They live in societies that have morphed to emphasize humanity’s ugliest aspects, with the setting usually embodying this mindset. The dystopian hero recognizes the faults of his world and acts on this realization in a way that affects his world and makes readers believe that humanity’s strengths will ultimately triumph. Or at least have hopes of doing so. That’s the bottom line: hope. Strive to write characters who are rich enough to shoulder this literary burden, and read widely in the genre so you won’t write cliches but rather offer a fresh take on this noble quest.

Happy writing!
The Editor

Winner, Wonder, and Week Off

//

Dear Readers…

Three months ago, many of you made this New Year Resolution: “Finish my manuscript!” It’s likely time for your follow-up resolution: “Revise my manucript!” Revision Week was designed to bring you tips, insights, and inspiration for that very task. Thank you many times over to the fab authors who pulled back the curtains on their revision processes, thank you all for joining in, and congrats to the week’s final giveaway winner, Patti J. Kurtz. Next week DearEditor.com will return to the usual format, with answers to the craft and industry questions you wonder about. Until then…

Happy revising!
The Editor

The Editor is indebted to the authors who made Revision Week such an informative and inspiring event that it will now be an annual event. If you missed any of their posts,click directly on the links below to jump to their insightful interviews…

Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3459

Kathleen Krull, author of more than 60 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3570

 R.L. LaFevers, author of the 13 novels for young people, including the popular middle grade series Theodosia Throckmorton and Nathaniel Fludd Beastologist, and now the forthcoming His Fair Assassin YA trilogy.  https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3517

Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, popular, bestselling chapter book collaborators. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3599

Mark A. Clements, horror/suspense author, screenwriter, and prolific ghostwriter. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3552

Nathan Bransford, top blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3531

Rachel Caine, bestselling author of more than 30 novels, including the popular series The Morganville Vampires, the Weather Warden, the Outcast Season, and  The Revivalist. https://www.deareditor.com/?p=3696

Revision Week BONUS Interview: Rachel Caine

///

Dear Readers…

The Editor is thrilled to present a BONUS Revision Week interview . . . with Rachel Caine! Rachel is the New York Times, USA Today, and internationally bestselling author of more than 30 novels, including the YA series The Morganville Vampires, the Weather Warden series, and the Outcast Season series. Rachel’s newest series, The Revivalist, launched in 2011 with Working Stiff, and her stand-alone YA novel The Great and Lamentable Tragedie releases this year.

Please join Rachel and The Editor for the Revision Week finale, and find out how to win the final “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Rachel Caine has been honored with a Paranormal Pearl Award and an RT Booklovers Award, and was recently awarded a Career Achievement Award from Romantic Times. She has appeared as a guest at over 100 science fiction, fantasy, mystery and romance conventions and conferences over the past 20 years, including Dragon*Con, San Diego ComicCon, the World Fantasy Convention, and the World Science Fiction Convention. Rachel has been featured in several national publications including People magazine, Entertainment Weekly, and Vanity Fair, and on international, national, and local television and radio. Today Rachel talks about revising when you’re under the gun.

*After Rachel’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Manuscript Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?

I’m in a very odd position. With a book due every three months, I don’t have a lot of luxury to rework things—they need to be close to the target (very close!) on the first draft. With the schedule I and my editors have, I have to be (somewhat foolishly) confident of my first draft. (Watch Rachel talk about The Morganville Vampires series here.)

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?

Generally, Version 1.5 gets sent in—I may have time for a fast read-through and tweak, but that’s pretty much it.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

None, until I get her notes; a LOT, after I receive those. I generally do a page one rewrite once I know what she sees as the strengths and weaknesses and problems, and comb through very thoroughly as I make those changes. Then, there are usually smaller questions that arise during copyedits that need solving. (Watch the Last Breath trailer here.)

Do you use critique partners?

Honestly, under my schedule, there’s no room for them. I’d love to have them, and when I have something that *isn’t* under that fierce spotlight of deadline, I do it. Generally, my agent (fellow author Lucienne Diver) also reads my manuscripts and gives me feedback while the editor is reviewing it as well, so I have additional input. I have nothing against critique partners, and have been a member of several groups, but it’s a timing issue now.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

Oh, yes. I just finished copyedits for that book, Two Weeks’ Notice (Book 2 in the Revivalist series). My original first draft was solid, but it had a huge plot hole—I specifically said that a certain virus took a month to incubate and become active, and then I had it happening almost immediately to a second character. That seems like an easy fix, but what the second character did under the influence of the virus was critical … and it seemed like a dead end, because I needed that one-month incubation period for story purposes. I solved it by realizing that what the second character did could be transferred to a third, unrelated character who could plausibly have been infected a month before. And it worked!

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

I once cut out half the book. HALF. Just took everything that happened after the “broken” scene and started over from scratch, because that scene was pivotal and everything after followed the wrong trail. It was difficult, but it worked in the end.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

There’s never a final draft for me, only the one you have to turn in because you’re out of time. But I guess if I had the luxury of having all the time in the world to do it, I think it would be the point at which I was bored with the story, where I didn’t want to play in that world anymore. There’s a certain fatigue that sets in, and I think if you’re reworking past that point, you’re not helping the story.

REVISION WEEK’S FINAL GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away one last FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 11, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 12, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) Do not attach or embed any part of your manuscript in the entry.

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck . . . and thank you for a fun week!

Revision Week: Nathan Bransford

///

Dear Readers…

Today was scheduled to be the grand finale of Revision Week, but the event has been so fun that The Editor can’t resist posting a bonus author interview tomorrow. Stop by for that surprise guest, along with a bonus edit giveaway.

For today, we’ve got the wonderful Nathan Bransford, author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade series and former literary agent with Curtis Brown. Nathan offers a unique view of the revision process thanks to his experience both as an author and as an agent ushering writers to book deals with publishers.

We’ve also got the promised “FREE Full Manuscript Edit” Giveaway from The Editor!

Nathan Bransford is the author of Jacob Wonderbar and the Cosmic Space Kapow and Jacob Wonderbar for President of the Universe, the first two novels in a middle grade series about three kids and their planet-hopping adventures. He was formerly a literary agent with Curtis Brown Ltd. from 2002 to 2010, but is now a social media director and the writer of the popular blog about writing and publishing, www.nathanbransford.com.

*After Nathan’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you’ve made?

This is a tricky question for me actually because I tend to edit as I go and don’t typically go through discreet drafts. But the novel is usually done for me after the third or fourth major overhaul.

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?

Whatever draft it is where I can’t bear to look at it anymore and have exhausted every possible idea.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

It depends on the book, but usually two major rounds of revision.

Do you use critique partners?

No, I don’t show it to anyone before I send it to my editor. I’m fortunate to have a really fantastic editor, Kate Harrison, who helps me mold the book into a much better form once I’ve gotten as far as I can go on my own.

As an agent, did you ever work through revisions with authors before submitting them to publishers?

Definitely, I was a very hands-on agent. I always thought it was important to make sure the manuscript was as good as possible before going out to editors.

Do agents work through revisions with writers before agreeing to represent them?

It depends on the agent. When I was an agent I preferred to work with authors on an exclusive basis but without an offer of representation in place. That way we could both see if we were happy with how the revision process was going and our working relationship and formalize the relationship once we were confident in the manuscript. But situations vary.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

When I started Jacob Wonderbar for President of the Universe I had this particular opening that was how I had always envisioned beginning the novel. But when I wrote it out and sent it to my agent and editor… it just didn’t work. I had to completely re-imagine the opening and start over from scratch. It was daunting at the time and I had to kind of take a deep breath and regain my confidence, but it was definitely the right choice. The revised opening is much stronger and I’m so fortunate I had an opportunity to take a new approach. (Watch the Jacob Wonderbar trailer here.)

What’s the most drastic revising experience you’ve been part of?

I had one client where I advised her to completely change the genre of her novel and revise the plot to match. It was a ton of work for the author but it worked! The new version of the novel ended up selling and doing really well. Sometimes at the heart of a draft there’s a great novel that needs to be brought to the surface and polished. (Hear Nathan’s thoughts about “pitching,” videoed at the 2010 San Miguel Writer’s Workshop here.)

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

When my editor says it’s done.

TODAY’S GRAND PRIZE GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away a FREE FULL MANUSCRIPT EDIT of your manuscript. The edit will be a “Substantive Edit,” in which the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience, as The Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.”

Here are the rules:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE and SHALL NOT EXCEED 90,000 WORDS. In the case of a picture book entry, the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 10, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 11, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Full MS Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) Do not attach or embed any part of your manuscript in the entry.

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this Revision Week giveaway to get additional entries today. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Mark A. Clements

///

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues with award-winning author Mark A. Clements. In addition to being a horror and suspense novelist, Mark has ghostwritten numerous books, giving him a distinct view of the revision process.

Please join Mark and The Editor for Day 5 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Mark A. Clements’ first horror novel, 6:02, was nominated for a Bram Stoker award. It was followed by the horror mystery Children of the End and the mystery thriller Lorelei, both of which received multiple nominations and awards. Mark’s The Land of Nod earned the Theodore S. Geisel “Best of the Best” award. All of Marks books have been optioned for film, and he also wrote the script for an original short, Dreamweavers. Mark is widely loved for his tireless work running critique sessions at writers conferences—often staying up to the wee hours to make sure every writer gets the chance to read and field full feedback.

*After Mark’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?

For me at least, the use of word processors pretty much destroyed the meaning of the word “draft.” Back in typewriter days I did about four drafts of each novel…now I write 30 or more versions of some portions, and five or six versions of other portions. I insist that there’s a correlation between quality and all the extra dinking around. I insist, I tell you!

Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?

The one I’m satisfied with. I always prefer to give an editor as little work (i.e., interfering) to do as possible.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

Typically not much.

Do you use critique partners?

“Partners?” No, no, no. I belong to a read and critique group with which I share portions of the work to see if it’s doing what I want, but I never share even slightly rough material and I don’t seek out advice on how to “fix” something. I don’t believe in writing by committee.

How does revision work in ghostwriting? How do you strike a balance between your judgment as a writer and the preferences of the person you’re writing for?

I never did strike that balance; I usually wanted to strike the person I was writing for. So I don’t ghostwrite anymore.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

My current novel features an organism that is alive but does not become conscious or self-aware until a third of the way through the story. I shuffled through two dozen openings before I realized that conscious or not, the organism needed its own point of view in order for the book to work. Getting there was a difficult but in the end very satisfying process.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

Thrown out 75 pages of stuff I originally thought was essential. Big lesson there….

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

There’s no other way to put it: the story feels done.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away one more FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 9, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 10, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) Do not attach or embed any part of your manuscript in the entry.

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Co-Authors Lin Oliver, Henry Winkler, & Theo Baker

//

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues with co-authors Lin Oliver, Henry Winkler, and Theo Baker. All three authors team up today to discuss the part collaboration plays in the revision of series and chapter books for young readers.

Please join Lin, Henry, Theo, and The Editor for Day 4 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Lin Oliver has written several series with her co-authors—17 best-selling “Hank Zipzer” books and now three best-selling “Ghost Buddy” books with Henry Winkler, and the brand new “Sound Bender” series with Theo Baker—plus a series of her own, the “Who Shrunk Daniel Funk?” series. These prolific co-authors have learned a thing or two about revision. They’ve joined forces once again in an insightful tag-team interview for Revision Week.

*After the interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

How does revision work within a collaboration?

LIN:  The first step in revising with a collaborator is to agree on what you want to revise. Even when working with someone with whom you’re very attuned, you will always have differences of opinion, or differences in ear—how you hear the words. A lot of back and forth conversation is involved in deciding what changes you want to make in your manuscript, and often, one of the two partners has to compromise. It helps to know each other’s strengths and weaknesses, so you can fairly adjudicate your differences of opinion. Working with Theo on Sound Bender, he thinks I tend to go for the funny rather than the dramatic. He’s right, and knowing that helps us realize my limitations. I think he’s sometimes too long-winded, so I always want to trim his material. (He calls me Dr. Scissorhands.) You have to be very flexible in your negotiations so both parties come away feeling ownership of the final draft, and also very sensitive not to make it a critique of your partner’s talents but a decision of what works best at any given moment in the manuscript.

THEO: It’s completely different than working alone. For one thing, you always have a nominally sympathetic reader waiting for pages—so there’s no need to put drafts in a drawer to try to forget about them before revising. But while revision is sometimes much more difficult flying solo, revising with a collaborator can often be much more painful! If something doesn’t work for your partner—even if it’s something you love—it skips the drawer and goes directly into the garbage can.

When you’re writing a series, you know your characters well. How many drafts are needed once you get a series established? What kinds of things are you refining at that level?

LIN:  The first book in a series is always the most difficult because you are discovering your characters’ voices, peculiarities, habits, backstory. Many drafts are necessary to deepen your understanding and portrayal of your characters. I find that several books into the series, the voices come very naturally and require less conscious effort. However, plot is always a sticky point for me, and that always requires revision and tweaking to keep the tension going and the scenes relevant. I also find that in series, you have to be a strict cutter, because when you know the characters so well, it’s easy to let them ramble on a bit, and those digressions—although interesting—can really stall the story.

THEO: Though I’ve only written two books about the same characters, writing one book is enough to get to know your characters well. Too well, in fact. In writing Sound Bender 2, I just plodded along with my boys (and girls), and then after the fact, we went back and established most of the major characters so our readers wouldn’t be quite so lost! Readers may read books in a series continually, or they may space out the books by years. I think most readers, even very good ones, are mostly confused most of the time. So we try to help them as much we can with character info early and often. Makes the reading experience a little less tense.

How early does your editor come into each new book?

HENRY and LIN: Our editors are always involved in the concept phase—both formulating the concept for the series and in a conversation about the plot line in general. Usually, we have to submit a title early on in the process, for marketing purposes, so the title often helps define the concept. Then we go away and write the book, and the editor comes back to us with notes after we submit the first draft. Often there is a second set of notes, usually much more specific in nature, and we make those adjustments. That pass allows us to do a line polish of our own, having had some time and distance from the manuscript. That’s when we go through and take out a weak joke, an unnecessary adjective, a flabby verb, an unnecessary line of dialogue.

THEO: The editors come in at the very earliest stages—and are usually the ones who remind you that you owe them another book, and for the love of coffee, you should probably get started on it. They usually want a brief outline or synopsis up front—just to know that you’ve got a sound map to follow, so they can sleep at night. Editors are great at this stage; they read so much and in such a particular way that they can see problems way down the road. Once they’ve helped you with your map, then they leave you alone for several months—ostensibly so you can write.

Henry, the Ghost Buddy series is a new one for you and Lin. Did the first manuscript fall into place quickly, or did it take a few rounds to settle into the new characters and voices?

HENRY: As I remember, because we are now happily on our third Ghost Buddy, it did take a little longer than usual to do the first book in the series. Billy Broccoli and The Hoove, our main characters, were pretty clear. It was the supporting characters that needed to become fully alive to us. We also worked really hard on the rules of having a ghost in the story—to set a clear and consistent set of rules and hold ourselves to them. This is not an easy task. (Watch Henry and Lin talk about writing the Ghost Buddy series here.)

Lin, your new supernatural series “Sound Bender” (with Theo) is for older readers and has an edgier, more adventurous tone than your books with Henry. How has working with a new collaborator on a new project for a new audience affected your approach to shaping a story?

LIN: Well, it’s important to note that my new collaborator is also my son, which complicates the interaction in both blissful and complex ways. We have to work hard not to make this a mother-son relationship, but an interaction between two colleagues of equal ability. Theo has a great sense of adventure and is always very close to what our key readers … tween boys … are interested in. I always defer to him in those areas. I am a bear about staying on story, keeping the tension high, making sure each scene serves a purpose in advancing the story, keeping things pacey. Theo, I think, is willing to tolerate a more meditative pace. We bump into each other a lot on that spectrum…how fast to move the story, how much digression to include, how much scientific and historical fact to highlight. The happy news is that I believe both Sound Bender books have benefitted from our collaboration and specifically from our having to work out this very issue. They are deeper than they would have been if I had written them alone, and quicker than they might have been had Theo written them alone. I think this is one instance when compromise resulted in a better all around book.

Do you share your manuscripts with kids to test them out?

HENRY: No, we don’t. If we laugh in the room, it goes in the book. If the rhythms we come up with in telling the story land easily on the ear, it goes in the book. If the theme moves us emotionally, it becomes the book.

THEO: I share them with my inner child, but no actual kids. I was a tough and discerning eleven-year-old—most of them are; they can spot lies and phoniness a mile away. My inner child will respond right away to anything fake with a devastating eye-roll and a sarcastic, “Yeah right, that’s so stupid.” He’s tough, and it hurts every time.

Lin, do you use critique partners when you write your “Who Shrunk Daniel Funk?” series, which is not a collaboration?

LIN: I don’t use critique partners, but I have several first readers who are central to me. I always talk through the plot with Steve Mooser, my SCBWI partner of the last 40 years. He is invaluable when it comes to hearing a story and foretelling whether it will work. Plot is always the area where I need the most help. When it comes to actually writing the scenes, I’m pretty sure-footed with my particular comedic voice. However, I’m about to begin doing research on a new kind of novel for me, a multi-generational historical saga, and I’m hoping to use critique partners there. It’s a brand new tone for me, and I’m sure I’ll need smart feedback.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

LIN: My story problems are always in the Second Act. I usually know the First Act, establishing the problem. And I usually know the Third Act, solving the problem. Where I stumble is in the middle, trying to create complications that are relevant to the story and build tension. In the second Sound Bender, which Theo and I just finished, we really struggled with the middle. Our hero, Leo, has to find the other half of a mysterious Siamese twin mask from Borneo. He uses his sound bending powers to do so. The middle of the story involves a trip to Borneo, and a journey down the river into the jungle (an homage to Conrad’s Heart of Darkness). What was really tough was how to make all the adventures on the river build tension and not be just exciting episodic events. In the end, we had to cut that act by at least half, to get rid of those scenes that were temporarily exciting but did not really contribute to the building of tension. It was miserable work, getting through that Second Act. We got lost on that damn river so many times before we could paddle our way out.

THEO: There’re so few rules in writing that I’ll latch onto anything that seems wise or helpful. One aphorism I like (and have no clue to its origin) is: If the narrative seems slow, that means you’re not focusing on the right things. (paraphrased)

If a story isn’t working, it seems flat, lifeless. And the reason why it feels lifeless is almost always because the main character is so overwhelmed with story and narrative beats that he can’t be himself, and can’t respond like a living person.

When I’m staring at a lifeless scene, one thing I like to do is what I call an “emotional draft.” When revising, it’s easy to get so bogged down in the weeds of language, story development, the “way it should be” that it can feel suffocating—both for you and the character. So the “emotional draft” is a blank page draft, where I just focus solely on what the characters are actually feeling in the moment, while momentarily forgetting about all the other work on that scene I’ve already done. It’s a very safe and playful exercise, and a great way to add life into empty words.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

HENRY and LIN: We usually have a very concise and clear outline before we start writing. What amazes us each time we write a book is that the story itself has a mind of its own and when we’re trying to go right, it often goes to the left. We have learned to faithfully follow, even if the result is a drastic change from the original plan.

LIN’s additional note: I often find I have to cut a character completely. I love to build in supporting roles, and on many occasions, have fallen in love with a character who doesn’t really have a vital role to play. I let myself write that character in the first draft, and then have to examine whether or not they’re just taking up space, no matter how charming I think they might be. I have an imaginary room in my house where those characters live. They’re all banging on the door trying to get into the next book. Some of them make it.

THEO: Short of incinerating entire drafts while sobbing, we’ve cut whole characters, whole finished chapters, whole subplots, etc. In our latest book, Sound Bender 2, we took a 140-page section and crunched it down into twenty-five compact pages. Lin says there’s nothing wasted in writing, but I think she’s full of it.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

HENRY and LIN: We know it’s done when we literally have come to the end of the story. Then we send it to our editors and get their thoughts. We carefully go over every thought and decide which ones resonate intellectually and emotionally. In the nineteen novels we have written together, we have never really had a major disagreement with our publishers that required us to change anything about what the book is that we imagined it to be.

LIN’s additional note: I have never read a published book of mine where I didn’t wince from wanting to go back and change it. I think this supports my belief that a book isn’t really done, it’s due. And thank goodness for that, or we’d just go on revising and tinkering forever.

THEO: There is no final draft. There are no endings, only countless beginnings. Just try to do your best work in the time you have, then beg and plead for another extension.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is giving away yet another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 8, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 9, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) Do not attach or embed any part of your manuscript in the entry.

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Robin LaFevers

///

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues today with Robin LaFevers, the author of fourteen books for young readers, including the Theodosia series, the Nathaniel Fludd, Beastologist series, and the much buzzed-about new His Fair Assassin series.

Please join Robin and The Editor for Day 3 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit”from The Editor.

Robin LaFevers was raised on a steady diet of fairy tales, Bulfinch’s mythology, and 19th century poetry, so it’s not surprising that she grew up to be a hopeless romantic. She has also spent a large portion of her life being told she was making up things that weren’t there, which only proves she was destined to write fiction. Robin’s most recent book, Grave Mercy, is a YA romance about assassin nuns in medieval France and has received three starred reviews and is a 2012 Indie Next Spring Pick. Robin was writing the final words of Grave Mercy’s follow-up (Book Two in the His Fair Assassins series) when The Editor asked her to participate in Revision Week. Robin steadfastly refused to answer a single question until she’d typed “THE END” on the draft for her editor. How’s that for maintaining focus?! Thankfully, Robin made her deadline and is now free to share her hard-earned insights on the revision process.

*After Robin’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

You jokingly dubbed yourself the Queen of Multiple Drafts. How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?

Oh gosh, that really depends on the book and how long it’s been percolating in my head! Since I tend to divide books into acts, my process usually involves working on act one for a number of drafts—four to five at the least, although sometimes it can be upward of seven. In those revisions, I really work on nailing down the character’s voice, the tone of the story, the world, and the major components of the character’s internal arc—what they think they want vs. what they need, the whys of all that, and then trying to understand and brainstorm what keeps them from achieving that. I can’t move on in the story until I get all that figured out. With the Nathaniel Fludd, Beastologist books, I did a lot of that in my head before I ever set pen to paper, so only needed a two or three drafts. With Grave Mercy, I worked all that out on the page in a daunting number of revisions.

When I do it that way, I find the rest of the book requires fewer revisions—maybe only three or four. And of course, once I reach The End and have the entire book complete, I have to go back and massage the first act so it all fits together, which is another revision or two.

Do you go through fewer drafts when you’re a few books into a series?  

Yes, thank goodness! And that is because so many of the elements are already established—the character’s voice, the essential personality, the players, the world. That and because those are written on contract with hard and fast deadlines.

Which draft gets shown to your editor? How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?  

Which draft I show to my editor depends on whether it is part of a continuing series or not. I don’t like to write books on spec, so if it’s a new project, I will typically have as polished and perfect a version of the book as I can. Or as polished and perfect as I can make it at that point in time. A critical part of my process is letting the book lay fallow for a while between drafts. When I do that, I find my subconscious does a huge amount of the heavy lifting for me, which always makes things easier.

So, for new projects probably anywhere from the seventh or tenth draft gets shown to my editor. For continuing projects, probably the third or fourth draft.

Now, the upside to doing so many drafts myself is that I usually only have to do one revision for my editor, and usually a fairly light revision at that.

For my most current project, the second book in the His Fair Assassin trilogy, I had to turn in a much earlier draft than I am used to and I have to say, it makes me hugely uncomfortable. Like showing up at a business meeting in my jammies. In fact, I was so twitchy about it that I sent along a copy of my revision notes—all the things I knew still needed work—to my editor, just to try and streamline the process and let her know I didn’t think all the manuscript’s bald spots were okay.

Do you use critique partners?  

I don’t use critique partners because it isn’t helpful to me to show my work while it’s in progress. I do use beta readers though (although that may be a matter of semantics) who read the entire manuscript and give me their thoughts. I find them to be enormously helpful. For me, beta readers are highly trusted readers (most often writers) who have similar reading tastes as I do and like/read in the genre that I’m writing. They are also, and perhaps most importantly, able to help me write the story I’m trying to write as opposed to giving suggestions on how to write it as if they were writing it—which of course would make it an entirely different book. That’s a really important distinction though, because oftentimes we can get too much feedback or feedback that is at crosspurposes to what we’re trying to accomplish. So I pick my first readers very carefully.

I usually hand off the entire manuscript to these readers after a few drafts but before the final draft—that way the manuscript is still malleable in my mind and hasn’t “set” yet. Sometimes, if I get it all polished up and think of it as “ready”, making big changes can be too hard!

Do you ever share your manuscripts with young readers to test them out?  

No, I haven’t really done that since my kids have grown up, but when they were little, I definitely used them for guinea pigs!

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?  

Oh, merde! I think I told you I have done countless drafts of Grave Mercy, mostly because there were so many story choices available, it took me forever to figure out which story I wanted to tell. Then once I did, I got to page 200 and realized that third person POV simply wasn’t working. So I had to change the entire book to first person, which is much, MUCH more than simply changing pronouns. There is an entirely different flow to language and narration when you change POV. The manuscript flowed much better, but I was still having problems. It wasn’t until page 350 (of a 420-page mss) that I realized the darn thing had to be in first person PRESENT tense. That was a giant scream heard round the world, let me tell you. And writing in first person present is like speaking an entirely different language, so I had to completely rewrite the whole damn thing. (View the Grave Mercy trailer here.)

Which taught me an important lesson: experiment with tenses and POVs in the early stages of a book—just don’t set your POV choice on default mode.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

When it is sent to the printer.

Seriously. I could fiddle and tweak forever. In fact, I have been known to tweak and edit on a printed copy of the book before doing a reading. But there is a point where you aren’t necessarily making it better—just making it different. Or so I try to tell myself.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

Today The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 7, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 8, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.) Do not attach or embed any part of your manuscript in the entry.

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Kathleen Krull

///

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week continues with award-winning author Kathleen Krull. In 2011 Kathleen was awarded the Children’s Book Guild of Washington D.C. Nonfiction Award, an honor presented annually to “an author or illustrator whose total body of work has contributed significantly to the quality of nonfiction for children.”

Please join Kathleen and The Editor for Day 2 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit” from The Editor.

Kathleen Krull has written some 60 books for young readers, most notably the award-winning series of “Lives of” books, now with new jackets and new titles forthcoming. The Editor had the honor of working with Kathleen on many of the “Lives of” books as well as other books at Harcourt Children’s Books.

*After Kathleen’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

When you write a new picture book manuscript, how many drafts does it typically take before you’ll show it to an editor?

From the days when every penny counted, I’m so cheap with paper that I don’t print out a draft after I make every little change, so it’s hard to say. I print at least 10 to 15 drafts, representing what seem like substantial changes, before I’m happy. When I get to the point of taking out commas and putting them back in again, I feel ready to send it off.

How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

A lot, as you know, Deborah, from sitting across the desk from me once upon a time. A good example is Harvesting Hope: The Story of Cesar Chavez. True story: between what I thought was my final draft, and what emerged after the editorial process, only one sentence stood intact: “Grapes, when ripe, do not last long.” It’s not that I deliberately send in something unpolished, it’s that editors are indispensable. (Note from The Editor: Kathy gave me permission to take credit for coming up with the “Harvesting Hope” title. I credit Kathy’s other wonderful editor at Harcourt with the revision fun.) Watch the National Endowment for the Humanities book trailer for Harvesting Hope here.

You’ve started co-writing with your husband, author/illustrator Paul Brewer. How does that collaboration work?

It’s truly a collaboration. One of us will start with an idea (Fartiste, needless to say, was his), a paragraph, or a first page, and we’ll then pass drafts back and forth, endlessly tweaking. Paul specializes in research. With Lincoln Tells a Joke, he found all the jokes. Same thing with our upcoming funny book about the Beatles. My focus is the final fine-tuning of the words. He typically works at night and I work days, so I’ll hand things off to him at the end of the day and find it back on my desk the next morning.

Did you use Paul or other critique partners for the books you wrote solo in the past?

Paul is usually the only one I show manuscripts to, for the simple value of watching his face as he reads. I can tell when he gets hung up, confused, or amused, and I use those reactions as clues when I’m revising.

Do you ever read your picture book manuscripts to kids to test them out?

I’ve tried this, but haven’t found it that helpful. I lean toward the “too many cooks” theory, that my views and the editor’s (and sometimes Paul’s) are what matter. More input than that can be muddling.

Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

With my biography of Dr. Seuss (The Boy on Fairfield Street: How Ted Geisel Grew Up to Become Dr. Seuss), I found it flummoxing that his life, from all outward appearances, was pretty darn charmed. I like to write about obstacles overcome, battles fought and won, and with him the more I researched, the less conflict I found. After many many drafts, I was finally able to tease out the theme that fooling around with words and pictures was not considered appropriate for an adult—but he did it anyway.

What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

With Fartiste, Paul and I tried every which way to tell the story of Joseph Pujol, a real French performer whose entire act was farting on stage. Nothing clicked until I hit upon telling the story in rhyme. Paul thought this was a terrible idea—among other reasons, most editors hate stories in rhyme. But then I came up with a few funny verses, and we were off and running. I’d like to use this remedy again, but it would have to be the right subject.

How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

When the editor and I have wrestled it into a story that seems to have written itself—that’s the goal anyway.

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

Today The Editor is giving away another FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules, with a bonus entry available to DearEditor.com subscribers:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 6, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 7, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Revision Week: Cynthia Leitich Smith

/

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com’s Revision Week kicks off with Cynthia Leitich Smith, the New York Times and Publishers Weekly best-selling author of Tantalize, Eternal, Blessed, Diabolical, and Tantalize: Kieren’s Story. Her award-winning books for younger children include Jingle Dancer, Indian Shoes, Rain Is Not My Indian Name, and Holler Loudly.

Please join Cynthia and The Editor for Day 1 of Revision Week, and find out how to win today’s “Free Partial Edit”from The Editor.

In addition to the kudos Cynthia Leitich Smith gets for her many books for young readers, her website www.cynthialeitichsmith.com was named one of the top 10 Writer Sites on the Internet by Writer’s Digest and an ALA Great Website for Kids. Her Cynsations blog at cynthialeitichsmith.blogspot.com/ was listed as among the top two read by the children’s/YA publishing community in the SCBWI “To Market” column. And she is a frequent speaker and writing instructor. Some serious multitasking going on here! In fact, Cynthia replied to DearEditor.com’s questions about revision as the final draft of her newest teen novel was rolling out of her desktop printer.

*After Cynthia’s interview are instructions for entering today’s Free Partial Edit Giveaway.

1. How many drafts does it typically take before you feel confident about the character and story choices you made?

It varies wildly from project to project and has changed over the course of my career. My latest picture book, Holler Loudly, was completed over six years and significantly re-imagined several times. However, there were countless “tweak” drafts along the way.

Back when every novel I wrote was wholly new, I used to write a “discovery draft” wherein, after some prewriting, I plunged in and wrote a full story (with a beginning, middle, and end—say, 35,000 to 60,000 words) to get to know my protagonists, their goals and their world. When I was done, I would print it. Read it. Toss it. And delete the file. It sounds harsh, I know. But the idea was to take some of the pressure off. Nobody but me would ever read that dreaded first draft. And I certainly wasn’t planning to build on such a shaky foundation.

With the Tantalize series and its new spin-off Smolder series, I’m largely revisiting previously featured characters—sometimes promoting a sidekick or ally to hero—so I don’t need to start as if from scratch.

Also, over the years, I’ve shifted from a writer shopping completed, polished manuscripts to one who sells on proposal. Even though the execution of those stories may vary from the original concept, that still requires me to do a lot of big-picture thinking up front. (Watch the Tantalize trailer here.)

2. Which draft typically gets shown to your editor?

Of late, I tend to send the third draft.

3. How much revising happens after the editor sees that draft?

Anywhere from one to three rounds of revision—typically two, plus copy edits and pass pages.

4. Do you use critique partners?

I used to be in a wonderful critique group, but then I started teaching MFA students and found that I could only read thoughtfully for so many writers. At the moment, my only critique partner is my husband and sometimes co-author, Greg Leitich Smith. We’re tougher and more frank with each other than we’d ever be with anyone else. A comment might read: “No way is this going out of the house with the family name on it.”

That said, I don’t generally recommend having a family member as key reader. I’ve seen it create conflict that goes beyond the page. Keep in mind that Greg is in the business—he’s well-published himself—and we met as first-year law students, so we’re long used to working together in a competitive context.

5. Can you share an experience of having a story problem you didn’t think you could solve but eventually did?

Not really. I have this unshakable belief that the answers to every story are somewhere in those early drafts. We just have to read our own writing carefully enough to find them.

6. What’s the most drastic thing you’ve done to a story while revising?

Eternal, a love story between a vampire princess and her “slipped” (not fallen) guardian angel, was originally a love story between a vampire princess and the son of Santa Claus. He was an elf. A short elf named Topher. The working title was “Fangs and Mistletoe,” which I still think is adorable. Santa died in that original draft, and those of you who write for young readers should take special note of the following: You should probably not kill Santa Claus in a book. Especially a book for kids.

Trust me on that one.

It was my editor’s assistant who suggested substituting an angel, and we released Eternal a season before the angel trend hit. I’ve been asked how I knew vampires—and then angels—would be big in YA. I had no idea. I was just writing the kind of books I’d loved to read as a teenager. (Watch Eternal trailer here.)

7. How do you know you’ve got the final draft?

When I have nothing left to give, and my editor starts making concerned noises about shuffling the manuscript off to the copy editor, which oddly, always seems to happen at about the same time.…

TODAY’S GIVEAWAY:

The Editor is celebrating Revision Week by giving away a FREE PARTIAL EDIT of your manuscript. Note that the winner of today’s giveaway IS eligible for Saturday’s grand prize Full Manuscript Edit Giveaway. Here are the rules:

  1. Your manuscript can be of ANY GENRE or CATEGORY (for adults or children, fiction or non-fiction), including picture books.
  2. The partial edit will cover the FIRST CHAPTER of your manuscript. In the case of a picture book entry, the edit will cover the entire manuscript—but the manuscript cannot exceed 7 double-spaced, 12-pt font pages.
  3. Deadline: MIDNIGHT tonight, March 5, 2012, PST.
  4. Winner will be randomly selected using Randomizer.org and announced on March 6, 2012, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking here. Type “Free Partial Edit Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this Revision Week giveaway to get additional entries today. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!

Welcome to DearEditor.com’s 2012 Revision Week!

//

Dear Readers…

This week DearEditor.com brings together eight prolific, bestselling, award-winning authors for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day—and enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

*Giveaway directions will be posted each with the interviews, starting tomorrow.

Welcome to a week of free edit giveaways (directions to be posted each day starting tomorrow) and revision advice and insights like these…

Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger: “Back when every novel I wrote was wholly new, I used to write a “discovery draft” wherein, after some prewriting, I plunged in and wrote a full story (with a beginning, middle, and end—say, 35,000 to 60,000 words) to get to know my protagonists, their goals and their world. When I was done, I would print it. Read it. Toss it. And delete the file.”

Kathleen Krull, author of more than 60 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers: “When I get to the point of taking out commas and putting them back in again, I feel ready to send it off.”

R.L. LaFevers, author of the 13 novels for young people, including the popular middle grade series Theodosia Throckmorton and Nathaniel Fludd Beastologist, and now the forthcoming His Fair Assassin YA trilogy: “There is a point where you aren’t necessarily making it better—just making it different. Or so I try to tell myself.”

Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, popular chapter book collaborators: “[With collaborations] you have to be very flexible in your negotiations so both parties come away feeling ownership of the final draft, and also very sensitive not to make it a critique of your partner’s talents but a decision of what works best at any given moment in the manuscript.”

Mark A. Clements, horror/suspense author, screenwriter, and prolific ghostwriter: “I never share even slightly rough material and I don’t seek out advice on how to ‘fix’ something. I don’t believe in writing by committee.”

Nathan Bransford, top blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books: “I was a very hands-on agent. I always thought it was important to make sure the manuscript was as good as possible before going out to editors.”

rachel caineUPDATE: The Editor is honored to add a BONUS interview – Rachel Caine! Rachel is the New York Times, USA Today, and internationally bestselling author of more than 30 novels, including the YA series The Morganville Vampires, the Weather Warden series, and the Outcast Season series.

 

Thank you for joining us. Tomorrow, Cynthia Leitich Smith pulls back the curtain on the revision process…

Guest Editor Melissa Wiley re: Facebook v. Google+ as Author Tools

//

Dear Editor…

My New Year’s resolution is to get active in social media and start “building my platform.” I don’t think I have time to be active in both Facebook and Google+. A friend says Facebook is established, so choose that. (I do have an account there but haven’t really used it.) Another friend says Google+ is the future, so choose that. I’m stuck. Advice?

Thanks,
R.

 

Dear R.…

If you have to pick one platform, Facebook is probably your best bet for now. With over 800 million active users a month, Facebook is where you are most likely to connect with your audience. You’ll want to decide between maintaining a personal profile—where you can choose to make some posts visible to the public, and others visible to your Facebook friends only—or a fan page, or both. Either way, you can share updates, links, and photos, as well as engage in conversations with your readers. If you do go the Facebook route, you’ll want to do a bit of online research to bone up on the platform’s privacy policies. The privacy settings can seem complicated at first, but there are many how-to guides on the web to help you navigate. Two great sources of info are GeekMom (“Lay-Geek’s Guide to Facebook Privacy” by Patricia Vollmer) and Mashable (“Facebook Privacy: 10 Settings Every User Needs to Know“). (Disclaimer: I’m a contributor at GeekMom.)

Google+ is growing every day, and it’s an appealing platform with a lot of flexibility. At this point, however, Google+ users tend to be early adopters and tech-lovers; it’s a smaller audience and you may find it harder to connect with readers there. But a point in Google+’s favor is that Google has reconfigured its search algorithms to give priority ranking to G+ posts! Nonfiction writers especially may find that a solid Google+ presence helps topic-searching users find them more easily.

Best,
Melissa Wiley
Guest Editor

Melissa Wiley is the author of more than a dozen books for children and teens, including Little House in the Highlands and other novels about the ancestors of Laura Ingalls Wilder. Her middle-grade novel, The Prairie Thief, will be published by Margaret K. McElderry Books in the fall. Melissa blogs about her family’s reading life at Here in the Bonny Glen ( melissawiley.com/blog ) and is a contributing writer and social media manager at GeekMom.com. You can find her on Facebook , Twitter and Google+ .

News: DearEditor.com Goes Mobile

Dear Readers…

Now you can access DearEditor.com on your iPhone or other mobile device. Go ahead, try it out. And if you’re a social media hipster, you’ll be glad to find DearEditor.com now on Google+ sharing industry news, creative inspirations, and writing tips to keep you in the publishing know.

Thanks to Theresa Stanton at blogsforphotogs.com, DearEditor.com is now mobile-friendly. With the new mobile design, you can easily read new posts and comments on your mobile device of choice, and you can post your own comments on-the-go. With a simple click on the arrow at the top of your mobile display, you can access archives, categories, and any page on the DearEditor.com website.

DearEditor.com is also pleased to announce the DearEditor.com Google+ page, which complements the DearEditor.com Facebook page and the @Dear_Editor Twitter feed.

Happy writing!

Announcing DearEditor.com’s Revision Week, March 5-10!

/

Dear Readers…

The Editor is thrilled to host eight prolific, bestselling, award-winning authors for a week of revision tips, insights, and stories from the trenches. Learn from writers who turn first drafts into lauded books every day—and enter the daily drawings for Free Partial Edits and the grand prize Full Manuscript Edit giveaway.

Read on for more…

Mark your calendar for a week of free edit giveaways and revision talk with these talented and generous authors:

Henry Winkler, Lin Oliver, and Theo Baker, popular chapter book collaborators. Henry and Lin collaborated on 17 books in the Hank Zipzer Series and now pen the Ghost Buddy series together. Lin and Theo are the creative duo behind the new Sound Bender series. And Lin has flown solo with her Who Shrunk Daniel Funk? series.

R.L. LaFevers, author of the 13 novels for young people, including the popular middle grade series Theodosia Throckmorton and Nathaniel Fludd Beastologist, and now the forthcoming His Fair Assassin YA trilogy.

Mark A. Clements, horror/suspense author, screenwriter, and prolific ghostwriter. All of his novels have been optioned for feature films.

 

Kathleen Krull, author of more than 60 books, especially picture books and biographies for young readers.

 

Cynthia Leitich Smith, bestselling YA gothic novelist, picture book writer, short story writer, and popular children’s lit blogger.

 

Nathan Bransford, top blogger and former literary agent-turned-author of the Jacob Wonderbar middle grade books.

 

Please join us!

News: eBook Winner; Free Online Workshop with the Editor

//

Dear Readers…

DearEditor.com is happy to announce the winner of the How to Promote Your Children’s Book eBook Giveaway, along with details about a free online YA Fiction workshop with The Editor.

Free online YA Fiction workshop with The Editor: Feb 21, 22, & 23 on the Institute of Children’s Literature website. The drop-in Q&A-format workshop takes place on the ICL’s message board, which anyone can read (no registration required). If you want to post a question, you do need to register (for FREE) by sending email to jan.fields@forums.institutechildrenslit.com with the username you want. Check out the ICL’s Guest Speaker archives while you’re there.

How to Promote Your Children’s Books eBook Giveaway winner: Julie K.

For more chances to win How to Promote Your Children’s Books, visit other stops on Katie Davis’s blog tour:

Also, check out Katie’s podcast “Promoting Your Book” (with a guest appearance by The Editor). Episode description here: http://katiedavis.com/how-to-promote-your-book/. Or click here to hear it directly.

 

Blog Tour: Katie Davis on Promoting Books (Book Giveaway!)

///

Dear Readers…

Author/illustrator Katie Davis is a tireless promoter whose 9 children’s books have sold over 250,000 copies. Today at DearEditor.com she’s sharing what she’s learned about promoting—and she’s giving away a free download of her new eBook How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller.

What I love about Katie Davis is how she can make even hard work fun. This attitude is on full display in her new eBook How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller, 30 chapters of practical advice about things like plotting your strategy, using social media, growing your mailing list, and using videos in ways beyond book trailers. I edited the book (disclaimer!), so I know there’s great info in it, from Katie as well as the 60 authors she interviewed for the book. Katie visited DearEditor.com as a Guest Editor last year to sort out the benefits of podcasting versus adding video to your website. Today she answers readers’ questions (and my own) about promoting books. At the end of the Q&A are instructions for entering a drawing for A FREE PDF DOWNLOAD OF HER BOOK.

Katie, you’ve got a lot of on-going promo tools such as your weekly podcasts. When you have a new book coming out, how far ahead of your pub date do you start book-specific promoting?

My mind can wander, imagine, plan and think of specifics while I’m finishing up the art (not the writing—I can only think of the story when I’m writing). With Little Chicken’s Big Day, every time I had a new idea, I added it to The List. Then once I turn in the art I can pay attention to that list, anywhere between 18 months to a year before the book comes out.

How do you balance your writing and promoting time?

Last year I did not do well on the balance thing! So far this year I am getting up early, doing a little social media action over coffee, and then I turn everything off and write in the mornings until lunch. After lunch I do other kinds of things, like my podcast or email answering, blog writing, etc.

Will the promotional strategies in your book work for novels, too?

Actually, it would work for any kind of book—including adult books. And in fact, the basic principles would work for any kind of promotion, though the examples are specific to children’s books.

And now a few questions from DearEditor.com readers…

I love your trailer for Little Chicken’s Big Day! What’s one effective way to use a trailer? —Anonymous picture book writer

One? Just one? Sorry. Can’t do that! Here are many things to do with your great book trailer:

  • Upload it to YouTube (you can use up to four different titles in order to upload four times, broadening your reach)
  • embed on your site
  • upload to other video sites like teachertube.com, booktrailersforall.com, and kidlitbooktrailers.ning.com/video
  • include the YouTube URL in your signature
  • create a QR code and include it on your business card
  • enter it in trailer competitions like the Moby or SLJ Trailee Award contests

Does it make sense to send free promo copies directly to teachers, as a contribution to their classroom libraries?BrickToyNut, MG fantasy writer

It would certainly be nice of you! It makes sense if you want to thank a particularly supportive or helpful teacher. However, if your goal is to generate word of mouth in the teaching community, I’d recommend holding a giveaway. Then tweet, blog, and Facebooking it to teachers would be far more effective. If your goal is to generate sales, it might be better to send support materials to tempt them to use the book in the classroom. You could do other things to be helpful, like offer “value added” services to make it worthwhile to purchase your book. Offering a free Skype Q&A to the class after they do an author study would be a great example of that. To connect with teachers for this kind of promotion, check out http://skypeanauthor.wetpaint.com/ or http://www.katemessner.com/authors-who-skype-with-classes-book-clubs-for-free/.

How important is it to create a teacher’s resource guide to go along with the book?BrickToyNut

It depends on the target age of your reader. Picture books should have activities or puzzles, or anything that extends the impact and value of your book. Middle grade and young adult novels should absolutely have a resource guide. You can offer it as a digital download on your site and other sites that sell your book, and if you have it printed you can make it available at book fairs, festivals, and school visits. I have one for a middle grade novel I wrote that did not do well, but I’m glad I have it because the teachers I’ve given it to love it!

Out of the many suggestions you have on how to promote a book, which one would you say has the highest success rate?Kurt Chambers, YA fantasy writer (whose first novel, Truth Teller, pubbed last week!) 

Congrats on your debut!

Genuine reciprocity is the best way to live online. It’s the thing I emphasize most in How to Promote Your Children’s Book. That means:

  • give before you get
  • support others
  • follow blogs not because you hope they’ll review your book but because you like what they have to say
  • engage in your community and connect

What does that look like?

  •  Tweet someone’s blog post because you like it
  •  Tell others about a great site
  •  Blog about something that will help other people

I wanted to make this tour worth it for anyone who would help me so I bribed enticed my hosts to join in the fun work by gifting them their own copy of the book. There is also promotion for them because they’re each linked on every blog I’m visiting, as well as on my own site. As hokey as it sounds, the thing that works best for me is to always try to give more than I get. It feels good to help others and if it feels good, you’ll be more likely to keep up with your promotional efforts, too.

How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller: PDF / For kindle / For Nook /For iPad, iPhone, iPad, iPod touch

Follow Katie’s blog tour for more promo insights & giveaways:

GIVEAWAY: Leave a comment on this post by midnight Wednesday, Feb 8, to be included in the random drawing for a free pdf edition of How to Promote Your Children’s Book: Tips, Tricks and Secrets to Create a Bestseller. Winner to be announced Thursday, Feb 9.

Katie Davis has published nine books and appears monthly on the ABC affiliate show, Good Morning Connecticut, recommending great books for kids. She produces Brain Burps About Books, a podcast about kidlit, a blog and monthly newsletter. Katie has volunteered in a maximum-security prison teaching Writing for Children and over the last dozen years has presented at schools and writing conferences. She’s a 2010 Cybils judge and has also judged the Golden Kite, smartwriters.com, and Frontiers in Writing awards. Recently Katie was selected to be on the Honorary Advisory Board for the Brooke Jackman Foundation, a literacy-based charity. For more about Katie and her book, go to www.KatieDavis.com.

“Free First 20 Pages Critique” Giveaway!

Dear Readers…

The Editor is celebrating the premier of her book trailer for WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES by giving away a FREE CRITIQUE OF THE FIRST 20 PAGES OF YOUR FICTION MANUSCRIPT. See the book trailer and get the full rules today on DearEditor.com.

Dear Readers…

Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies has a book trailer—and I’m celebrating with a “Free First 20 Pages Critique” giveaway! Check out the nifty trailer then use the blue bar on the right to scroll down for the giveaway rules.

Now for the giveaway rules:

  1. Your manuscript must be FICTION of ANY GENRE (general, sci fi, romance, steam punk . . . you get the idea; no non-fiction like how-to’s or memoirs—as fictional as those may seem; and sorry, no children’s picture books this time). Your manuscript can be for adults or young readers (YA or MG).
  2. The FIRST 20 PAGES of your manuscript must be COMPLETE.
  3. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.
  4. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, October 20, 2011, PST.
  5. Winner will be randomly selected and announced on October 21, 2011, in the DearEditor.com comments section and on the DearEditor.com Facebook page, and the winner will be notified directly via email.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of the blog or by clicking this link. Type “Free First 20 Pages Critique” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include the TITLE of your manuscript, the GENRE, the CATEGORY (adult, YA, or MG) and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of DearEditor.com and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion.

Disclaimer: The Editor does not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

Good luck!
The Editor

Thank you. Now Have a Free Webinar.

//

The Editor’s month-long party celebrating the publication of Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies may be ending with today’s final stop on her WYAFFD Blog Tour, but she’s got one last grand finale event for writers: her eye-popping, info-laden FREE webinar tomorrow with high-energy author/illustrator Katie Davis….

WYAFFD cover

Dear Readers…

I’m excited to team up with Katie Davis tomorrow, July 27, for “Translating Rejection Letter Lingo: What To Do about a ‘Flat’ Story.” I hope you’ll stop by to hear my tips for pumping up flat fiction and to take part in the listener Q-and-A. With Katie’s fab visuals, you’ll be as entertained as you are informed. [Register here.]

Phew! A week-long virtual book launch, an 8-stop blog tour, a free webinar, book and ‘free edit’ giveaways, and a dozen interviews, podcasts, and guest posts on others’ blogs. . . . It’s been a busy month, but I believe every new book deserves a party. I sure hope you’ve enjoyed mine.

Thank you, and happy writing!
The Editor

Meet the Editor

.


Deborah Halverson
was an editor at Harcourt Children’s Books for 10 years before becoming the award-winning author of Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies,  Writing New Adult Fiction, two teen novels (Honk If You Hate Me and Big Mouth), the picture book Letters to Santa, and three books in Remix series for struggling readers. She has been working with authors—bestsellers, veterans, debut, and aspiring—for over twenty years. The books she’s edited have garnered awards and rave reviews, and many of the aspiring writers she’s coached have landed agent representation and lucrative book deals.

Deborah is now a freelance editor specializing in Young Adult/Middle Grade fiction and nonfiction, New Adult fiction, and picture books.

In addition to founding DearEditor.com, Deborah serves on the advisory board for the UC San Diego Extension “Children’s Book Writing and Illustrating” certificate program. She speaks extensively at workshops and conferences for writers. For more about Deborah, visit DeborahHalverson.com.
Twitter: @Dear_Editor, @DeborahHalversn
Instagram: deareditordotcom, deborahhalversonbooks
Facebook: DearEditorcom, DeborahHalverson

What writers say about Deborah:

“Deborah’s feedback is smart and focused. She makes the kind of comments you can really do something with. My manuscript was sold at auction for a 2-book deal.”–Jeff Hirschbestseller, The Eleventh Plague & other YAs

“Deborah’s expertise helped me fine-tune my debut novel Written in the Stars and was the smartest decision I made for my writing career. The lessons I gained from her advice stay with me to this day.”–Aisha Saeed, bestseller, Amal Unbound and Written Under the Stars, YA

“Deborah’s perceptive editorial remarks helped me look at my manuscript in a whole new way and gently pushed me and my book to a higher level. After implementing Deborah’s suggestions, I received a 2-book publication deal. Her concise, discerning suggestions taught me many skills I have carried over in the crafting of other novels.”–Kristen Landon, award-winning, Life in the Pit, The Limit, & other YAs

“Deborah has her finger on the pulse of YA fiction and can diagnose even the most elusive problems in a manuscript. Her suggestions have proven to be spot on time and time again. She can take a book from good to great; a rare skill that requires a keen eye and nuance. Working through an edit with Deborah is educational and fun, not fear-inducing and depressing, because she also won’t hesitate to tell you what you’re doing well. My manuscript quickly landed a 3-book deal after her edit. I highly recommend her.”– Chris Babu, The Initiation series, YA

“My manuscript received two offers and both publishers agreed to have a two-book offer…. Your touch brought the book to a higher level. I couldn’t thank you enough for that.”–Ji-li Jiang, award-winning, Red Scarf Girl & other YAs & picture books

“Deborah is an insightful editor who goes above and beyond what I expected. She has a way of communicating her thoughts in a gently constructive way that makes sense. I incorporated her comments into the revision of my manuscript, DANCE WITH BORZOIS, and landed a contract with Knopf.”–Annemarie O’Brien, award-winning, Dance with Borzois, YA

“Deborah is not only an excellent, discerning, and responsive editor, she is also a great pleasure to work with. She has a fine command of language and a great sense of story.”–Jean Ferris, award-winning, Once Upon a Marigold & other YAs

“Deborah is a crackerjack editor–creative, caring, and clever–and those are just the C’s.”–Kathleen Krull, award-winning, Harvesting Hope & other nonfiction picture books

“Deborah was a big reason I was able to sell my novel to a publisher. She has a keen eye, she works quickly and efficiently, her guidance is right on, and she sees the big picture.”–Sarah Scheerger, Operation Frog Effect & other MGs, YAs, young readers, and picture books

“I worked on my first manuscript for years and wasn’t getting anywhere. I was stuck. Until, I sent a draft to Deborah. She was able to look at it through the lens of an editor and make suggestions I hadn’t thought about. Every one of them made my manuscript stronger. She pointed me in the right direction. It’s the manuscript that got me an agent and my first book sale.”–Kim Turrisi, Just A Normal Tuesday, YA

“The best person who ever happened to my novel, Tiger Drive, is Deborah Halverson. She was the first editor to see it. Thanks to her manuscript evaluation and her advice to ‘give us a reason to care about these characters,’ my debut novel went on to win Best New Fiction at the American Fiction Awards.”–Teri Case, award-winning, Tiger Drive and other fiction/nonfiction for adults

“Deborah did much more than line-editing. She suggested a completely new ending to my Christmas novelty book. It helped me avoid predictability and layered the revised work with much more complexity and depth. She’s awesome!”–Kimball Fisher, bestseller, Finding Baby Jesus & other fiction/nonfiction for kids and adults

“In addition to being a keen editor with discerning tastes and inspired vision, Deborah is also an enormously talented writer who is tuned in to the interests and issues that engage young readers. Her energy, experience, enthusiasm, and knowledge make her an extraordinary teacher. She is a clear and engaging communicator, and her sly sense of humor sparkles.”–Robin Cruise, publisher, author

“Deborah is not only extremely knowledgeable but also capable of sharing that knowledge productively. And her critiques provide valuable insight for our writers. She is an excellent instructor with a keen sense of what each writer needs to hear to improve their work and the sensibility to provide critiques in a manner in which they are well-received.”–Antoinette Kuritz, Literary Publicist, Strategies Public Relations Consulting; Founder/Director of the La Jolla Writers Conference

For more about Deborah and her books, visit her author site DEBORAHHALVERSON.com.

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

BLOG TOUR: Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies

9780470949542 cover

Wiley, ISBN: 978-0-470-94954-2

The blog tour celebrating Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies‘s publication is over, but you can still read the fun, informative interviews and guest blog posts by The Editor covering craft, promotion, & the business of publishing. Click on links below:

Shrinking Violet Promotions “Flipping the Switch from ‘Introvert’ to ‘Extrovert'” – How to get yourself ‘out there’ and spread the word about your books even if you’re an introvert at heart.

SCBWI Children’s Market blog “Serving Up Subtext” – How to use subtext to enhance your fiction.

QueryTracker.net “Melodrama Isn’t a Four Letter Word” – Use *gasp* melodrama to add authenticity to your YA voice.

Elizabeth O. Dulemba Blog – Interview with The Editor covering YA market trends, an author’s mindset when writing for young people, and author submission prospects.

Cheryl Rainfield Blog“Banishing the Blahs from Your YA Fiction” – Using narrative beats to pump up the action and energy in a lackluster manuscript or scene.

Story Connection – Interview with The Editor about drafting a series, creating teen-friendly characters, avoiding common submission mistakes, and battling writer’s block.

The Got Story Countdown – Interview with The Editor covering the differences between chapter books and easy readers, visual storytelling in picture books, and 4-foot-tall wooden men. (Yes, you read that right.)

Free “Translating Rejection Letter Lingo: What to Do with a ‘Flat’ Story” webinar w/ The Editor & Katie Davis – This 1.5-hr FREE webinar covered four fixes for a “flat” story, along with answers to attendees questions about the craft, market, and business of writing. For attendee reaction, click here. For a description of the webinar and information about upcoming webinars in Katie Davis’s KidLitWebinars.com series, click here.

Wiley, ISBN: 978-0-470-94954-2

Print free Cheat Sheet
See on Amazon | B&N | IndieBound | Goodreads

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

NEWSFLASH: a DearEditor.com “FREE Fiction Edit” Giveaway

Dear Readers…

To celebrate the completion of her final manuscript for Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies, the Editor is giving away a FREE Substantive Edit of one fiction manuscript for adults or young readers. Deadline: April 21, 2011. Read on for rules….

Dear Readers…

You’ve been on the Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies journey with me, so you should be a part of its milestone celebrations—and there’s cause to celebrate now. On Monday I received word from my editor that the manuscript is now final and moving on to production: “You’re done!” I celebrated with my family by treating them to a night of grand desserts; I celebrate with you by giving away a free Substantive Edit* of one fiction manuscript. Yes, this one is open to young adult fiction AND fiction for grown-ups. Scroll down using the sidebar on the right for all the rules:

1. Your manuscript must be FICTION FOR ADULTS or YOUNG ADULT OR MIDDLE GRADE FICTION (no picture books), ANY GENRE (general, sci fi, romance, steam punk . . . you get the idea; no non-fiction like how-to’s or memoirs, as fictional as those may seem).

2. Your manuscript must be COMPLETE.

3. Your manuscript SHALL NOT EXCEED 80,000 WORDS.

4. Manuscripts that do not meet these requirements will be disqualified.

5. Deadline: MIDNIGHT, APRIL 21, 2011, PST.

6. Winner will be randomly selected and announced on APRIL 22, 2011.

TO ENTER:

One entry –  SEND EMAIL to DearEditor.com using the “Write to The Editor” button at the top of this blog. Type “Dummies Celebration Giveaway” in the subject line. In the body of the email, include TITLE of manuscript, YA or MG or ADULT, WORD COUNT, and YOUR FULL NAME. (If you have any difficulty with the contact button, send an email entry directly to dear-editor@hotmail.com.)

Bonus entry – SUBSCRIBE. DearEditor.com subscribers get a bonus entry by sending a second email with “Subscriber’s Bonus Giveaway Entry” in the subject line and your title, YA or MG or ADULT, word count, and full name in the body. (Note: the Editor will verify!) Not a subscriber yet? Then subscribe now by clicking on the “Subscribe” button at the top of this blog and then email your second entry.

Extra bonus entries – SPREAD THE WORD. Blog, tweet, or otherwise electronically tell others about this giveaway to get additional entries. Send an email to DearEditor.com with “I Spread the Word!” in the subject line, and in the body include a link to your blog post or your Twitter address or your Facebook wall or whatever social media you used to spread the word. Don’t send screen-shots; attachments won’t be accepted. Include your title, YA or MG or ADULT, word count, and full name in the body. Spread the word more than once? Then send an “I Spread the Word!” email for each one!

Anyone who doesn’t follow these rules will be disqualified, at the Editor’s discretion. Disclaimer: I do not share or in any other way use your contact information; it’s collected solely for winner contact purposes at the end of the giveaway.

*In a “Substantive Edit,” the author receives general feedback about the manuscript’s overall pacing, organization, narrative voice, plot development/narrative arc, characterization, point of view, setting, delivery of background information, adult sensibility (children’s books only), and the synchronicity of age-appropriate subject matter with target audience, as the Editor determines appropriate and necessary after reviewing the entire manuscript. It is not a word-by-word, line-by-line “Line Edit.”

Okey-dokey, that covers it. After the giveaway I’ll announce the winner and then get back to answering great reader questions, featuring great guest editor posts, and planning a whopping virtual book launch for the Dummies book. Seriously, the launch will be big: multiple days filled with daily giveaways, features, and free downloads. More on that as the July 5, 2011, pub date nears.

Happy writing!

The Editor

 



News: Dummies, Revision Workshop, FREE EDIT Giveaway

Dear Readers…

I’ve got great news about Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies, a revision workshop, and a FREE EDIT GIVEAWAY. Read on for the details…

Dear Readers…

On Monday I received an email from my editor for Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies saying, “You’re done!” All the words and periods are in place and the manuscript is now moving into production, headed for pub date July 5, 2011. This means three things:

1. It’s time for a new Free Edit Giveaway
Because that’s how I like to celebrate (well, that and chocolate). Check DearEditor.com on Friday (4/15/11) for the giveaway details.

2. My editorial hiatus is over
I am officially picking up my red pen again. You can read more about what and how I edit on this page or you can print this pdf which describes my services.

3. Announcing a revision workshop
Registration is open for the Cottonwood Intensive Revision Workshop, to be held May 21, 2011, in Cottonwood, CA (17 miles south of Redding, CA, and approx. 2 hours from Sacramento). I’ll be teaching at the event, which is dedicated to helping children’s book writers revise their young adult novels and picture books. The 1-day workshop is hosted by SCBWI’s California North/Central chapter, with Edgar Mystery Award nominee author Charlie Price and award-winning picture book illustrator, art director, designer, and educator Dr. Mira Reisberg filling out the faculty. For more information or to register (deadline May 1, 2011), contact scbwicanorthcentral@gmail.com, go to the conference website, or click here to view the conference flyer.

Okay, that covers this news break. Off now to get ready for the Free Edit Giveaway….

Happy writing!

The Editor

Promote My Own Book? How???

/

Dear Editor…

Ok. So, I’ve published my book. NOW, HOW TO PROMOTE IT???? The publisher has some publicity but not enough . . . they have a hundred books to promote. I’d like to help my book. So what can you suggest???

Thank you,

Mimi

Dear Mimi…

It’s true that with so many books to promote, publishers focus their efforts on a few key titles each season even as they do basic marketing for the others. Luckily, there’s plenty that authors can do to self-market. I dedicate 33 pages to self-marketing alone in my Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies (final revisions of which go to my publisher today; do you smell a DearEditor.com “celebration free edit giveaway” in the air?). Alas, authors can’t do it all any more than publishers can. So copy their model with your efforts: Focus on three key marketing items for your self-marketing campaign. You can grow from there later. Your three choices will depend on your particular expertise, time, resources, and goals. What’s your best medium—blogging, podcasting, appearances, social media? What are you promoting—you the Expert on Something, your book, a specific aspect of your book’s topic, your genre or literacy in general? What can you give people to earn their attention and make them spread the word for you—free books, free information, free bonus material or study guide downloads, free exposure for their books in exchange for exposure of yours? You must strategize all of this before you take any specific action or create specific materials because catch as catch can is not an effective marketing campaign. Above all, stop thinking of yourself as an Author Who Wants to Help; appoint yourself Self-Marketing Manager and drive a focused, efficient, and effective campaign that’s tailored to your strengths and abilities.

Happy writing!

The Editor

Editorial Services

DEBORAH HALVERSON has been working with authors—bestsellers, veterans, debut, and aspiring—for over twenty years. The books she’s edited have garnered top industry awards, and many of the aspiring writers she’s coached have landed agent representation and lucrative book deals.

“Deborah’s feedback is smart and focused. She makes the kind of comments you can really do something with. My manuscript was sold at auction for a 2-book deal.”–Jeff Hirsch, author

“Deborah’s perceptive editorial remarks helped me look at my manuscript in a whole new way and gently pushed me and my book to a higher level. After implementing Deborah’s suggestions, I received a 2-book publication deal. Her concise, discerning suggestions taught me many skills I have carried over in the crafting of other novels.”–Kristen Landon, author

“My manuscript received two offers and both publishers agreed to have a two-book offer…. Your touch brought the book to a higher level. I couldn’t thank you enough for that.”–Ji-li Jiang, author

“Deborah is an insightful editor who goes above and beyond what I expected. She has a way of communicating her thoughts in a gently constructive way that makes sense. I incorporated her comments into the revision of my manuscript, LARA’S GIFT, and landed a contract with Knopf.”–Annemarie O’Brien, author

“Deborah is not only an excellent, discerning, and responsive editor, she is also a great pleasure to work with. She has a fine command of language and a great sense of story.”–Jean Ferris, author

“Deborah is a crackerjack editor–creative, caring, and clever–and those are just the C’s.”–Kathleen Krull, author

“In addition to being a keen editor with discerning tastes and inspired vision, Deborah is also an enormously talented writer who is tuned in to the interests and issues that engage young readers. Her energy, experience, enthusiasm, and knowledge make her an extraordinary teacher. She is a clear and engaging communicator, and her sly sense of humor sparkles.”–Robin Cruise, publisher, author

“I feel like I just got a personalized graduate course in writing!”–Meghan Hill, author

By conducting word-by-word line editing or more general substantive editing, Deborah Halverson (“The Editor”) helps authors hone their storytelling voices, synchronize age-appropriate language and subjects, and develop stories that appeal simultaneously to young readers and to adults such as parents, teachers, and librarians. With Deborah’s guidance, improve your manuscript’s…

Narrative voice
Plot development / narrative arc
Pacing
Organization
Characterization
Point of view
Setting
Delivery of background info
Visual storyline (picture books)
Age-appropriate subject matter and target audience
Word choice
Rhythm
Sentence variety
Dialogue
Chapter / section breaks
Grammar / mechanics

$150 per hour for substantive or line editing. Email Deborah@DeborahHalverson.com for a free estimate of total hours required or to discuss other editorial services such as query letter review. For an in-depth look at Deborah’s editorial process, read this printer-friendly pdf: Editorial Processes and Fees

Writing Books

Enjoy two books about the art, craft, and business of writing from Deborah Halverson, founder of DearEditor.com, veteran editor, and author.

Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies

Writing New Adult Fiction

For Deborah’s novels, picture books, and books for struggling readers, click here.

WritingNewAdultFiction 

WRITING NEW ADULT FICTION

WritingNewAdultFiction

Foreword by Sylvia Day.  A guide for writers of New Adult fiction, featuring essential information and techniques for creating engaging stories featuring 18- to 25-year-old protagonists against the backdrop of the new adult experience. Includes advice on self-publishing in the NA marketplace and self-marketing. Find insights from best-selling NA authors as well as editors and agents.

SAN DIEGO BOOK AWARD

“For the writer who wants to become a new adult author, or the new adult author who seeks to enrich her craftsmanship and stand out from the herd.”Tammara Webber, New York Times best-selling author of Easy and Breakable

Read interviews & guests posts in the blog tour
See on Amazon | B&N | IndieBound | Goodreads | Writer’s Digest Books

WRITING YOUNG ADULT FICTION FOR DUMMIES

Foreword by M. T. Anderson.  Techniques and proven tips on all the steps of writing a young adult or middle grade novel, from developing an idea to publication and marketing. A hands-on, friendly guide to writing novels for young people.

“Fun, insightful and tremendously helpful.” San Diego Union-Tribune

  • self-marketing to help writers move boldly into the realm of self-promotion
  • techniques and exercises to shape plot, create teen-friendly characters, develop a convincingly youthful voice, write natural dialogue, and use setting to illuminate characters and plot
  • 13 National Book Award winners and finalists, Newbery medalists and honorees, and other award-winning luminaries sharing their insights in sidebars
  • self-editing tools to transform a first draft into a strong submission-ready final draft
  • insider tips for finding the right agent and/or editor and preparing a stand-out submission package
  • answers to common book contract questions
  • advice on self-publishing for YA writers

More about the book
Print free Cheat Sheet
Read interviews & guest posts in the blog tour
See on Amazon | B&N | IndieBound | Goodreads

COLLABORATORSDeborah is honored to include the voices of 13 award-winning and best-selling YA/MG novelists, agents, and editors in sidebars throughout Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies

M.T. Anderson writes the heart-tugging foreword for Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. Anderson is a National Book Award Winner and Finalist, an L.A. Times Book Prize Winner, and a two-time Michael L. Printz Honor Book Author. His books cross genres and engage audiences of every age.

Jane Yolen has been called the Hans Christian Andersen of America and the Aesop of the twentieth century. She’s the author of more than 300 books for young readers and adults, including fantasy and science fiction novels, historical novels, poetry, and children’s books. Her books and stories have won the Caldecott Medal, two Nebula Awards, two Christopher Medals, the World Fantasy Award, three Mythopoeic Fantasy Awards, the Golden Kite Award, the Jewish Book Award, the World Fantasy Association’s Lifetime Achievement Award, and the Association of Jewish Libraries Award, among many others. Can you think of more proven writer to tell you how to infuse each of your stories with a unique narrative voice? Deborah couldn’t—so she asked Jane to do just that in Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies.

Karen Cushman has created some of the most memorable characters in young adult fiction, including Alyce from the Newbery Medal Book The Midwife’s Apprentice, Catherine from the Newbery Honor Book Catherine, Called Birdy, California Morning Whipple from The Ballad of Lucy Whipple, Meggy from Alchemy and Meggy Swann, Will Sparrow from Will Sparrow’s Road and the stars of Matilda Bone and Rodzina. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Karen shares how she dreams up characters—and then lets them loose to do their own thing.

Kathi Appelt had published over 20 award-winning books for kids, but she wanted to write a novel for middle graders. Only, it wasn’t working. Draft after draft, idea after idea, she kept abandoning lackluster manuscripts only partly completed. She couldn’t get herself to care about her characters, and if she didn’t care, why would readers? Then it hit her: she was missing tension in her stories. That epiphany led to her debut middle-grade novel The Underneath, which went on to become a National Book Award Finalist. She’s written more novels, including the award-winning The Keeper. Kathi shares her insights about raising the stakes for characters in Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies.

Cynthia Leitich Smith knows a thing or two about writing paranormal fantasy that’s compelling, timeless, and surprising: she’s the best-selling author of the YA gothics Eternal, Tantalize, and Blessed, and other novels and graphic novels for teens. Cynthia has also written numerous award-winning books for young children and is a faculty member at the Vermont College M.F.A. program in Writing for Children and Young Adults. Her “Cynsations” blog is one of the top sites read by the children’s/YA publishing community.

Jennifer Donnelly is the author of several award-winning novels for adults and young readers, including the Carnegie Medal Winner and Michael L. Printz Honor Book A Northern Light and the genre-melding historical drama Revolution. When School Library Journal called Revolution “a sumptuous feast of a novel, rich in mood, character, and emotion,” they were right on. Jennifer’s novels always capture the feeling of a place and time, allowing readers to see, taste, smell, hear, and feel the story along with the characters. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Jennifer shares just how she does that.

Deborah Wiles is known for writing dialogue that captures character as well as the flavor of a time and place. She is the author of the National Book Award Finalist Each Little Bird That Sing, Countdown (book one of “The Sixties Trilogy: Three Novels of the 1960s for Young Readers”), and other novels and picture books for young readers. Deborah talks about using dialogue to express both emotion and action in Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies.

Gary Soto knows how to structure a plot that keeps readers turning pages, and he shares that knowledge in Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies. Gary is the author of many much-loved middle grade and young adult novels, short stories, plays, and poetry collections, including Accidental Love, The Afterlife, Mercy on These Teenage Chimps, and the acclaimed Baseball in April and Other Stories. For more of Gary’s insights, read his feature in the Atlantic, in which he talks about his amazing relationship with the editor who has marked up his poems since 1974.

Mary E. Pearson may have written many award-winning teen novels, but she isn’t immune to writer’s block. (Is there a writer who is?) Luckily, Mary has figured out ways to keep writing—and she shares them in Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies.  Mary is the New York Times bestselling and award-winning author of ten novels, including the trilogy, The Kiss of Deception, The Heart of Betrayal, and The Beauty of Darkness. Her novel The Adoration of Jenna Fox, and the other books in the series have been optioned for film.

Darcy Pattison is the author of many award-winning picture books and novels for young people, the founding publisher of Mims House, and the 2007 recipient of the Arkansas Governor’s Arts Award for Individual Artist for her work in children’s literature. She’s widely known for her Novel Revision Retreat and her book The Book Trailer Manual. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Darcy shares three ways to create a successful book trailer that leaves room for your readers’ imaginations even as it promotes your book. Her blog, Fiction Notes at darcypattison.com, is her online home base.

Jean Ferris is the author of almost twenty acclaimed novels for teens, including quirky middle grade stories like Once Upon a Marigold and serious YA fare such as the powerful Eight Seconds. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Jean shares two crucial pieces of advice that she heard early in writing career and which have helped her inject conflict and passion into her plots ever since.

Editor Kate Harrison is a senior editor at Dial Books for Young Readers. She’s edited both debut authors and bestselling, award-winning veterans, so she knows all about the author-editor relationship. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Kate offers a behind-the-scenes look at what happens after you sign your book contract and ways to make the revision process with your editor both productive and enjoyable.

Agent Erin Murphy has a good bead on the qualities that editors, readers, and the marketplace want in a young adult book—and “quiet” isn’t one of them. In Writing Young Adult Fiction For Dummies, Erin shares tips for making quiet books loud. Erin is the founder of Erin Murphy Literary Agency, a leading U.S. children’s book agency representing writers and writer-illustrators of picture books, novels for middle-graders and young adults, and select nonfiction. Thanks to her early editorial career (she eventually became the editor-in-chief at Northland Publishing/Rising Moon Books for Young Readers), Erin brings an editor’s eye to her agenting.

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

SaveSave

About

Meet The Editor…

Deborah Halverson was an editor at Harcourt Children’s Books before becoming the award-winning author of Writing Young Adult Fiction for Dummies, Writing New Adult Fiction, two teen novels (Honk If You Hate Me and Big Mouth with Random House), the picture book Letters to Santa, and three books in Remix  series for struggling readers. She has been working with authors—bestsellers, veterans, debut, and aspiring—for over twenty years. The books she’s edited have garnered awards and rave reviews, and many of the aspiring writers she’s coached have landed agent representation and lucrative book deals.

In addition to founding DearEditor.com, Deborah is now a freelance editor, author, and writing instructor. She speaks extensively at workshops and conferences for writers and edits adult fiction and nonfiction while specializing in teen fiction and picture books. For more about Deborah, visit www.DeborahHalverson.com.

What writers say about Deborah:

“Deborah’s feedback is smart and focused. She makes the kind of comments you can really do something with. My manuscript was sold at auction for a 2-book deal.”–Jeff Hirsch, author

“Deborah’s perceptive editorial remarks helped me look at my manuscript in a whole new way and gently pushed me and my book to a higher level. After implementing Deborah’s suggestions, I received a 2-book publication deal. Her concise, discerning suggestions taught me many skills I have carried over in the crafting of other novels.”–Kristen Landon, author

“My manuscript received two offers and both publishers agreed to have a two-book offer…. Your touch brought the book to a higher level. I couldn’t thank you enough for that.”–Ji-li Jiang, author

“Deborah is an insightful editor who goes above and beyond what I expected. She has a way of communicating her thoughts in a gently constructive way that makes sense. I incorporated her comments into the revision of my manuscript, DANCE WITH BORZOIS, and landed a contract with Knopf.”–Annemarie O’Brien, author

“Deborah is not only an excellent, discerning, and responsive editor, she is also a great pleasure to work with. She has a fine command of language and a great sense of story.”–Jean Ferris, author

“Deborah is a crackerjack editor–creative, caring, and clever–and those are just the C’s.”–Kathleen Krull, author

“In addition to being a keen editor with discerning tastes and inspired vision, Deborah is also an enormously talented writer who is tuned in to the interests and issues that engage young readers. Her energy, experience, enthusiasm, and knowledge make her an extraordinary teacher. She is a clear and engaging communicator, and her sly sense of humor sparkles.”–Robin Cruise, publisher, author

DearEditor.com is the place for writers—published or not—to ask questions about the craft of writing and/or the publishing industry… and get direct answers and actionable suggestions.

  • Are editors telling you that your characters are flat?
  • Are you losing readers by page 2?
  • Don’t know what a hook is or why it’s so darned important?
  • Trying to navigate all the do’s and don’ts of submitting your manuscripts to publishers and agents?

Whether you write fiction or nonfiction, for children or adults, this is the place to get guidance regarding issues like these. Look through the archives, respond with your own comments or tips, or email your own questions. (Alas, due to time and volume constraints, not all emails can be answered.)

Want more?

 TO LEARN ABOUT THE EDITOR, CLICK HERE.